MFX-2590

Field Engineering Manual

Muratec America, Inc.

U.S. Version 3.0

Battery Precautions

Important
We do not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries are sold only as component parts of the main control board, and cannot be purchased separately from us. NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to local, state and federal regulations.

NOTE
ontents of this manual can be changed without prior notice. C here can be errors in this manual even though we have made best efforts to create the accuT rate manual. We are not liable for any loss and/or damage that are implemented to the MFP by using this manual. he parts/components that are used in the MFP are delicate and can be easily damaged if T they are not handled in appropriate method. We recommend strongly that maintenance of MFP should be made by the maintenance engineers who are the authorize service engineers. Before starting any work, remove static electricity beforehand.

Table of contents
1 General Description ................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description .......................................................................................................................1-1 1.2 Specifications ................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Machine Composition .............................................................................2-1

2.1 Document Scanning Sequence .....................................................................................................2-1 2.2 Recording Section .........................................................................................................................2-5 2.3 Image Processing..........................................................................................................................2-7 2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram ........................................................................................................2-12 2.5 Circuit board constructions ..........................................................................................................2-17 2.6 Sensors .......................................................................................................................................2-21 2.7 Function detail and additional information ...................................................................................2-23

3 Adjustment Procedures ..........................................................................3-1

3.1 Field Service Program Modes .......................................................................................................3-1 3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment ....................................................................................................3-3 3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment .........................................................................................................3-25 3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes........................................................................................3-51 3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment ..........................................................................................................3-55 3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings .....................................................................................3-83 3.7 All RAM Clear ..............................................................................................................................3-83 3.8 T.30 Monitor ................................................................................................................................3-84 3.9 Printer maintenance mode ..........................................................................................................3-87 3.10 Service Report Printing .............................................................................................................3-90 3.11 Monitor speaker.........................................................................................................................3-95 3.12 Test Modes................................................................................................................................3-95 3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and ....................................................................3-100 Unique Switch Settings ...........................................................................................................3-100 3.14 Factory Functions ....................................................................................................................3-101 3.15 Line Tests ................................................................................................................................3-105 3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode ................................................................................................3-108 3.17 Consumable order sheet .........................................................................................................3-109 3.18 DRAM Clear ............................................................................................................................3-115 3.19 Life monitor maintenance ........................................................................................................3-115 3.20 Sensor input test .....................................................................................................................3-117 3.21 Printer diagnostic mode...........................................................................................................3-118 3.22 Network service mode .............................................................................................................3-119 3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check ...........................................................................................................3-120 3.24 Set Service Report ..................................................................................................................3-120 3.25 Printer registration adjustment ................................................................................................3-122 3.26 Reset printer trouble ................................................................................................................3-123 3.27 Cleaning mode ........................................................................................................................3-123 3.28 Key counter mode ...................................................................................................................3-124 3.29 Network switch mode ..............................................................................................................3-124 3.30 Touch panel adjustment ..........................................................................................................3-129 3.31 Printer control parameter mode...............................................................................................3-129 3.32 Network capture (Packet capture) ...........................................................................................3-132 3.33 Storage maintenance ..............................................................................................................3-135 3.34 Coverage Rate ........................................................................................................................3-137 3.35 Service function menu .............................................................................................................3-137 3.36 Wire cleaning warning .............................................................................................................3-137 3.37 Installing language ..................................................................................................................3-138 3.38 Counter information maintenance ...........................................................................................3-139 3.39 Asset Number..........................................................................................................................3-139 3.40 Quick Initial settings ................................................................................................................3-140 3.41 Update the software ................................................................................................................3-140 3.42 Network service functions ......................................................................................................3-148 3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings.............................................................................................................3-157
i

4 Troubleshooting Procedures ..................................................................4-1

4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart ............................................................................................................4-1 4.2 Initial checks ..................................................................................................................................4-2 4.3 Checkout error...............................................................................................................................4-3 4.4 Communication tourble .................................................................................................................4-7 4.5 Image quality problems ...............................................................................................................4-25 4.6 Document trouble ........................................................................................................................4-43 4.7 Recording Paper Jam..................................................................................................................4-46 4.8 Machine malfunction ...................................................................................................................4-47

5 Maintenance & Adjustment.....................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule ..................................................................................................................5-1 5.2 Disassembly procedures ...............................................................................................................5-2 5.3 Adjustment ................................................................................................................................5-110

ii

1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
2 1 3 4

13 12

11 10 9 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Name ADF cover Document guide Document tray Bypass tray Side cover 1 Side cover 2 Description Open this when a document jams and when cleaning the scanning area. This supports the document so that it is fed straight. Load the document here face up. Used when printing on envelopes, transparencies, and custom paper sizes. Open this when paper jams and when replacing the drum cartridge. An optional paper cassette. Open this when paper jams. 8 7 6

Document output tray Scanned documents are output here.

Paper level indication The areas indicated in red increase as the paper level in the paper window cassette decreases. Front cover Paper cassette 1 Paper cassette 2 USB connector Control panel Open this when replacing the toner cartridge or drum cartridge. This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper. This holds approximately 500 sheets of paper. This cassette is optional. Connect USB memory here to save scanned images to USB memory or print images stored on USB memory. This panel includes the touch panel and the keys required for operation.

1-1

14

24

23

22 16 21 20 17 19 18

15

No. 14 15 16 17 18

Name Platen cover Document glass ADF glass Paper exit tray Main power switch

Description This holds down the document. Load the document here aligned to the top left of the glass. This is where documents loaded in the ADF (Auto Document Feeder) are scanned. The copied or printed paper exits with the printed side down in this tray. This switch is used to turn the machine ON and OFF. Normally, leave the power ON. Turn it OFF if you do not use the machine for a long period of time or move it. Connect the power cord here. Connect the LAN cable here. Connect the USB cable here. Connect a handset here. Connect an external phone (such as an answering machine) here. Connect the modular cable here.

19 20 21 22 23 24

Power jack Network connector USB port Phone jack External phone jack Telephone line jack

1-2

25 26 27 28

No. 25 26 27 28

Name Toner cartridge

Description Load the toner cartridge here.

Charge wire cleaning When the print quality drops, move this rod back and forth to clean the rod charging wire. Drum cartridge Load the drum cartridge here. Toner cartridge lock When replacing the toner cartridge, push this lever down the left side, and then pull out the cartridge. lever

1-3

1.2 Specifications
Item Copy Specifications / General Specifications Scanning method Acceptable document size Auto document feeder (sheets) >Doc. Thickness >Doc. Weight (g/m2) Paper Media (for MP/Bypass) Color CCD FBS: Max. Legal ADF: Max. Legal Max:80 sheets (Letter/Legal 75g/m2 documents) 0.05 - 0.15mm (Single Sheet) 0.07 - 0.12mm (Multi Sheets) 35.0 - 128.0g/m2 (Single Sheet) 52.0 - 105.0 g/m2 (Multi Sheets) PlainPaper(60-90g/m^2) , PasteBoard(-120g/m^2), Envelope[D L(SEF),COM#10(SEF),Monarch(SEF)] /Postcard[100mm(W) 148mm(L) (3.95.8 inch)], OHP* *does not guarantee all environments or all OHP films (suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500) Max:Scanner 600dpi / Printer 600dpi 25ppm (picking paper from 1st cassette) approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20C) 1-99 yes/yes: (FBS/ADF) FBS: 25 - 400% (1% step) ADF: 25 - 100% (1% step) LTR: 50% ,64%, 78%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 154% 500sheets(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray)* *20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray) 500sheets x 2(Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray) *20sheets(PasteBoard,Bypass Tray) G3 & Super G3 (horizontal x vertical) 600dpi 600lpi or 16 dots/mm15.4 lines/mm (initial setting) (406 dpi 392 lpi) *Can be switched by user operation 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 8 dots/mm3.85 lines/mm (203 dpi 98 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) PSTN 2sec. level (Super G3) 6sec. (G3) MH, MR, MMR, JBIG 14400,12000,9600,7200,4800,2400bps Control signal speed: 300bps 33600,31200,28800,26400,24000, 21600,19200,16800,14400,12000, 9600,7200,4800,2400bps Control signal speed: 2400,1200bps Specifications

Resolution (Max) Continuous copy speed (Max.) >Letter SEF Warm up time # of copies Enlargement/Reduction >Setting range >Preset (LTR Setting) Recording paper capacity (Std.) (Max.) Fax Specifications Compatibility Resolution (Scanning/Tx/Rx) >Super Fine

>Fine >Normal >Grayscale Telephone network Transmission speed Coding method Modem >G3:

>SuperG3:

1-4

Item Other Information Image data memory capacity (Std.)

Specifications RAM 128MB Copy&FAX: 66MB Copy Stored pages: 600pages Fax Stored pages: 4200pages 72 hours (After 24 hours full-charge) 256MB 1GB Hi-Speed USB2.0(Std.) Hi-Speed USB2.0 Host(Std.) Ethernet 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX(Std.) 520506473 mm (Std. 2Way/1cassette) 520506593 mm (Max.: 3Way/2cassette) Std. 2 Way / 1 cassette : 58.4 lbs (26.5 kg) Max. 3 Way / 2 cassette : 68.4 lbs (31.5 kg) 8.5 inches 800dots x 480dots (WVGA) By QWERTY key on touch panel AC 115V10% 50Hz/60Hz Std. config. / Max. config. 17.0 / 22.0 (W)

Memory Backup (Standard) CF card capacity (Std.) (Max.) Interface

Appearance >Dimensions (W x D x H) >Dimensions (Max) (W x D x H) >Weight (without consumables) LCD >LCD size >LCD resolution Character Input method Power requirements Power consumption >Low Power mode >Sleep mode >Ready >Transmission >Reception >Copy >Max. Environmental conditions >Practical temperature >Practical humidity Scanner Unit Scanning method >Scanning method >Lamp >Optical resolution (Max.) Color scanning >Color >Black & White >Grayscale Effective scanning width >Copy >>A4/Letter >Fax >>A4/Letter

6.6 / 7.3 (W) 60.0 / 64.0 (W) 68.0 / 72.0 (W) 1000 / 1010 (W) 1040 / 1050 (W) 1040 / 1050 (W)
10 - 32 C (when humidity is 68%) 20 - 80 % (when temperature is 30C)

Color CCD White LED array 600dpi x 600dpi yes yes 256 level

Letter:216 mm Letter:214 mm

1-5

Item Contrast adjustment >Auto >Manual (# of levels) >Modification for the original document back-ground Document setting position and Scanning Alignment (FBS) Acceptable document size (FBS) >Auto detection >Max. W(mm)D(mm) Document Size >Auto detection >Acceptable Doc. Size >>Single page Document Through Size >>>Max. Document Size >>>Min. Document Size >>>Doc. thickness >>>Doc. Weight (g/m2) >>Multi pages Document Through Size >>>Max. Document Size >>>Min. Document Size >>>Doc. thickness >>>Doc. Weight (g/m2) Scanning Alignment (DADF/ADF) Document setting (DADF/ADF) Auto document feeder (sheets) (DADF/ADF) Scanning resolution >Copy (B/W) (Auto, Text, Photo, Photo/Text, Background Off) >Fax >>Memory transmission >>>Super Fine yes, Only Copy mode

Specifications

yes (5 levels) Automation (w/o photo mode) Rear left corner

no 216 x 356 mm (Legal: SEF) no *can detect the length after scanning

216 x 900 mm 120 x 100 mm 0.05 - 0.15 mm 35g/m2 - 128g/m2 216 x 356 mm 216 x 139.5 mm 0.07 - 0.12 mm 52.0 - 105.0 g/m2 Center Face up 80 sheets (Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF))

All modes: 600 dots/inch x 600 lines/inch

>>>Fine >>>Normal >>>Grayscale >>>Background off >>Real-time transmission >>>Super Fine

600dpi 600dpi or 16 dots/mm15.4 lines/mm (406 dpi 392 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 8 dots/mm3.85 lines/mm (203 dpi 98 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 600dpi 600dpi or 16 dots/mm15.4 lines/mm (406 dpi 392 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 8 dots/mm3.85 lines/mm (203 dpi 98 lpi) 16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm (406 dpi 392 lpi) 8 dots/mm7.7 lines/mm (203 dpi 196 lpi) 100dpi x 100dpi

>>>Fine >>>Normal >>>Grayscale >>>Background off

1-6

Item >PC-Scan (B/W) (Auto,Text,Text/ Photo,photo,Background) >>>Optical Resolution

Specifications

600dpi 600dpi 300dpi 300dpi 200dpi 200dpi 100dpi x 100dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi

Default >TWAIN >Scan to Folder (SMB) >Scan to E-mail >Scan to FTP >Scan to User >Scan to USB >PC-Scan (Color) (Auto,Text,Text/ Photo,photo) >>>Optical Resolution

600dpi 600dpi 300dpi 300dpi 200dpi 200dpi 100dpi x 100dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 300dpi 256 levels yes, Normal/Fine/Super-Fine/Photo/Background off (default: Normal) yes, Text/Auto/Photo/Background off (default: Auto) yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi (default: 300dpi/Text&Photo(Auto)) yes, Text/Text&Photo/Photo yes, 100dpi/200dpi/300dpi/600dpi (default: 300dpi/Text&Photo) yes, 5levels (default: Normal) yes, Auto, 5levels (default: Auto) yes, 5levels (default: Darker) yes, 5levels (default: Darker) yes (Option) Bottom of Original, surface Pink OPC drum Dry & Electrophotographic method LED multi-stylus electrode Manual Mono Component non-magnetic development method Heat Fixing by the heat roller

Default >TWAIN >Scan to Folder (SMB) >Scan to E-mail >Scan to FTP >Scan to User >Scan to USB Grayscale (B/W) Primary mode >Resolution (Fax Tx) >Doc. Type (Copy) > Resolution/Doc. Type (Mono PC Scan)

> Resolution(Color PC Scan)

>Contrast (Fax Tx) (Copy) (PC Scan B/W) (PC Scan Color) Confirmation stamp > Stamp place > Stamp color Printer Unit Sensitive drum type Printing method Exposure method Charging Method Cleaning Method Developing method Fusing method

1-7

Item Recording paper size (1st - 2nd Cassette) (Bypass Tray)

Specifications Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF) Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF), Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF), A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF), Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF), Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm)

Margin >Copy >>Top/Bottom >>Left/Right >FAX >>Top/Bottom >>Left/Right >Printer >>Top/Bottom >>Left/Right Print speed (Max.) Duplex Print speed (Max.) Alignment Warm up time Paper Supply Recording paper capacity (Standard) (Max.) Recording paper >Cassette (1st-2nd) >Bypass Tray >>Paper Media (for MP/Bypass)

3mm 3mm 3mm 3mm 3mm 3mm 25ppm (Letter SEF, print from 1st cassette) 25PPM (H-Letter LEF, print from 1st cassette) 6.9ppm (Letter SEF, print from 1st cassette) Upper left approx. 20sec. (room temperature: 20C) Cassettes + Bypass Tray 500sheets (Cassette) + 50sheets (Bypass Tray) 500sheets (Cassette) x 2 + 50sheets (Bypass Tray) 1st: (Standard) / 2nd: (Option) Plain Paper, Pasteboard, Envelope/Postcard, OHP* * does not guarantee all environments conditions or all OHP films (suggested OHP film: 3M PP2500) Letter (SEF), Half-Letter (LEF), Legal (SEF), Executive (SEF), A6 (SEF), A5 (SEF/LEF), A4 (SEF), F4 (SEF), DL (SEF), COM#10 (SEF), Monarch (SEF), Postcard (SEF), Custom Size(width:97-216mm, length:140-356mm) * Paper except A4, F4 and A5 (LEF) should be supplied from Bypass Tray 60-90 g/m2, 20-24 lb(Cassette) 60-120 g/m2, 20-28 lb (Bypass tray) Face down 250 sheets (A4SEF) (N-N environment) Cartridge type with developer 16,000 sheets (Letter, 6%, 2-page cycle print) or Driving Time 30,000 sheets (Letter, 2-page cycle print) and Driving Time (2-page cycle print) yes yes (option) yes *When using paper other than A4, Letter, or Legal size, the machine may not perform the shift sorting function correctly due to environmental variation and paper quality.

>>Recording paper size

Weight of Recording paper Out put type of Recording paper >Out put paper tray capacity Toner Cartridge Toner Quantity Drum Cartridge >Drum Life(2page-cycle print) >Duplex Print >Mechanical Counter Shift tray

1-8

Item FAX Tx Function Transmission >Width of document >Length of document TTI ># of TTI >Subscriber ID Real-time transmission

Specifications

A4 width 900mm(Normal, Fine, Hfine) 500mm(Ufine) 22 characters 3 20 characters yes (DADF/ADF only) -When Archiving setting is ON, Scanner TX(RealTime Tx/ Manual Tx) is not be able to use. yes yes yes 100 commands yes (Option) Bottom of Original, surface Pink

Memory transmission Quick memory transmission Error Correction / Re-transmit >ECM # of transmit reservation Confirmation stamp > Stamp place > Stamp color FAX Rx Function Reception Size >Width of Recording paper >Length of Recording paper Memory reception Rx print reduction Out-of-Paper receptions Reception mode Special Function My Jobs ># of Jobs ># of characters Title ># of job steps Soft Key ># of Setting >Set available functions (FAX)

Max.A3 No limit yes yes yes (250 faxes) FAX Ready, TEL/FAX Ready, FAX/TEL Ready, ANS/FAX Ready, TEL Ready yes 6 40 yes (displays the first 26 characters of registered characters) N/A (no limit) yes 6 Preview, Resolution, Contrast, Redial, Monitor, Speed-Dial, AutoDist. Duplex Scan, Auto Rx, SecurityRx, TTI, Cover Page, Tx Report, FileFormat, Scan Size, Next Doc., Polling, F-Polling, Polling Doc., F-Code Tx, F-Code Doc., Closed Tx., ID Check, Memory Tx, Boradcast, Mail Address, Mail History, e-mail Subject, Batch Tx, CheckMail, Delayed Tx, E Gateway Preview, Zoom, Card Copy, Doc.Size, Bypass, Combine, Next Doc., ScanTag no Preview, Doc.Type, Contrast, Resolution, Zoom, Scan Size, Next Doc., Color, DuplexScan, Broadcast, Batch Scan, FileFormat, Speed-Dial, File Name, Mail Addresss, e-mail Subject, Mail History, Color Adjust, Attachment, Category, Comments, TWAIN Box, Scan Path, Hold Time Preview,Doc.Type,Contrast,Resolution,Zoom,Scan Preview/Doc.Type/Contrast/Resolution/FileName/Color Resolution/Contrast/Redial/Monitor/Broadcast

>Set available functions (COPY) >Set available functions (PRINT) >Set available functions (SCAN)

>Default Setting >>Copy >>Scan >>Fax

1-9

Item Paper Source Setting >Fax/ List Print >Copy >PC Print Security Communication Function >Confirmation of Broadcast Destinations >Twice Dialing >Security Reception User Access & Usage Control >Communication Administration >Copy Administration >Scan Administration >Print Administration Energy Saving >Hard Key on control panel >Low power mode >>Entering time setting range >Sleep Mode >>Entering time setting range >Auto Recover Time Set Communication Data Archive Day light saving time >Default(Start Day&Time/End Day & Time) >Start/End Timing Setting Consumables Auto Order System ># of destinations to order (FAX) ># of destinations to order (E-Mail) >Order timing Service Call Error Notice ># of destinations to send notice (E-mail) >Notice Timing PC-FAX Basic Function Support for Network Communication Protocol Data Format Communication Capability (PC-FAX) Document Size Coding Method Communication Standard Transmission Speed Tx Function (PC-FAX) Direct Tx from Applications Tx by Client User Transmit reservation command # of Transmit reservation command Broadcast Transmission Max. # of Destinations yes (OFF, ON) yes (OFF, ON) no yes yes yes yes yes yes (ON/OFF) yes (ON/OFF) yes (ON/OFF) yes (ON/OFF)

Specifications

yes yes yes (Green LED) 1-60min yes (Red LED) 1-120min yes (Start Time/End Time) yes yes Start: 2:00AM on 2nd Sunday of March End : 2:00AM on 1st Sunday of November yes (by memory switch), month and week yes (Send/Print/OFF) (Default : OFF) 1 location (1 Service call number can set) 1 location Low Toner Warning/Drum Near End yes 3 when the service call error happens Yes HTTP/HTTPS/RAW/LPD TIFF A3/B4/A4 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG T.30(FAX)/T.37(I-FAX) Max. 33.6Kbps(FAX)/MAX. 100Mbps(I-FAX) yes (by FAX Driver) yes Exclusive command file Less than 100 (less than 90 when using archive function) Max.4060 - address book(fax): 2000 - address book(ifax): 2000 - direct input(fax): 30 - direct input(ifax): 30 yes address book groups yes

Group Transmission Max. # of Group Fax/E-mail mixed Tx

1-10

Item Rx Function Routing Conditions All received Fax Routing Conditions setting TSI Partial conditions match Multiple conditions(OR) Caller ID Partial conditions match Multiple conditions (OR) Number display Partial conditions match Multiple conditions(OR) ITU-T Subaddress/Password Subaddress Multiple conditions(OR) From Address book RX line AND/OR Routing Detination To User # of User # of User Group To FAX by Speed Dial by Address Book by Panel by LDAP Server To Mail by Address Book by Panel by LDAP Server The attachment file format To Shared folder by Shortcut by input folder path by Browsing Routing protocol SMB (Windows) NFS(Linux) AppleTalk(Mac) Attachment file format To FTP by Panel by Shortcut To Box Expansion setting >Shared inbox >>Classification Routing Conditions

Specifications

yes yes yes yes (prefix match/exact match/suffix match/partial match) no yes yes (prefix match/exact match/suffix match/partial match) no no N/A N/A yes no yes (according to fax/email address in the address book) N/A no (AND in a routing table, OR between the routing tables)

200 (fixed) 200 (fixed) no yes no no yes no no TIFF-S/TIFF-F/PDF yes no no yes no no TIFF/PDF/Encrypted PDF no no yes (share box, delete box) yes no

1-11

Item Distribution Schedule >Always >Day of the Month setting (Start/End) >Day of the Week setting (Start/End, Every week) >Time setting (Start/End) Auto Print of distributed document (ON/OFF) Routing setting operation from machine control panel >Auto Print of distributed document >Suspend of routing (by record) >Suspend of routing (All records) Communication Log Display Communication Log Auto Print Manual Print File download Copier Function # of copies # of copying job Enlargement/Reduction >Setting range >Preset Contrast adjustment >Auto

Specifications yes yes yes (can not specify the days of the week with specified time) yes yes

no yes yes

yes (Control Panel/Browser) yes yes (Control Panel/Browser) yes (CSV format only: max. 20) 1-99 10 jobs yes/yes (FBS), no/yes (ADF) FBS: 25-400% (1% step) ADF: 25-100% (1% step) FBS: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100%, 121%, 129%, 154% ADF: 50%, 64%, 78%, 100% yes

>Manual (# of levels) yes (5 levels) >Modification for the original document back- Automatic ground Copy mode Auto,Text, Text/Photo, Photo,Background Copy Resolution 600 x 600 dpi Half tone level Automatic Paper Selection Automatic Magnification Selection Duplex copy Electric sorting Rotation copy Auto tray change (limitless paper supply) Image edit >N in 1 copy >Card Copy >>Document Size 256 levels yes yes yes yes yes (Only reduction) yes (when Auto Cassette is selected and the same sized paper is inserted in 1st/2nd cassettes or in the Bypass tray.) yes (2 / 4 in 1, rotation support) yes Personal Check Size: 2.8 x 6.2inch Business Check Size: 3.5 x 8.5inch Credit Card Size: 2.2inch x 3.4inch 2 Credit Card Size: 3.4 x 4.4inch yes

>>Custom Size Setting

1-12

Item Dialing / TEL Function Speed Dial ># of locations Auto dial registration name indication Phone line type On hook dial Caller ID External telephone Phone line Cable Auto Answering Lists Dial list >Speed Dial >Group number list My Jobs list Polling >Reserved documents print Communication reservation >Reserved documents print Activity journal >Manual printing >Auto printing >Daily Printing System settings list T-30 monitor list PC-Print Basic Function Configuration Support for Local Support for Network Data Transfer Protocol >Standard TCP/IP >>LPR >>Port9100 >>>Port9100 SNMP >>>Port9100 PJL >IPP >IPDS Print Language GDI PCL5e PCLxL PJL Command Font >Latin >Barcode/OCR >Cyrillic PS3 Font >Latin PDF Font >Latin XPS

Specifications

2,000 yes (when pressing the indication button) Pulse/Tone yes yes yes (possible to connect the answering machine) yes yes

yes yes yes yes yes yes yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax Tx & Rx, I-Fax Tx & Rx, Scan to folder, Scan to FTP / independently) yes, Latest 100 comms (Fax, I-Fax, Scan to folder and Scan to FTP in total) yes, (Print Time can be Set/ Excluding I-FAX, Folder, FTP / Print if there is no Tx/Rx) yes yes (Service Function) GDI(Standard) ,PCL/XPS(Option), PS3/PDF Direct(Option) yes, USB2.0 (High Speed) yes, 10/100Mbps(Auto Negotiation or fixed)

yes (IPv4) yes yes (WindowsXP or later except Windows 2000) yes yes (IPv4/IPv6) IPP version1.0 yes (with PCL) (with AXIS Print Server) (for IBM AS400) yes (Standard) yes (Option) yes (Option) yes yes 80 fonts 32 fonts (Option) (PCL5e Only) 15 fonts (PCL5e Only) yes (Option) yes 136 fonts yes (Option), PDF1.7 Compatibility yes 136 fonts yes (Option)

1-13

Item Printer Controller (PCL5e/XL) Text Print Printer Setting >I/O Time-Out setting >Form Setting[Line/Pages] >Resolution >CR/LF yes (Default: 300 sec.)

Specifications Yes(Only Network Connection, Local Connection is not supported.)

yes 5 -128 (Default: Auto) yes 600 / 300 (Default: 600dpi) yes CR only, LF only/CR=CR+LF, LF=LF/CR=CR, LF=CR+LF/ CR=CR+LF, LF=CR+LF (Default: CR only, LF only) Yes (Default: Courier) yes 0.44-99.99 (Default: 10.0) yes 4.00-999.75 (Default: 12.0) Yes (Default: PC-8 Code Page 437) PC/AT compatible machine no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes

PCL Font >Font Type >Font Pitch

>Font Size

>Symbol Set Specification of client PC >Support PC, WorkStation >Support OS >>Windows 95 (English) >>Windows 98 >>Windows 98 Second Edition >>Windows Millennium Edition >>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later) >>Windows 2000 Professional >>Windows XP Home Edition >>Windows XP Professional >>Windows XP Professional x64 Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition

>>Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition yes >>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition yes >>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition yes >>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 Edition yes >>Windows Vista Home Basic (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Business (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Ultimate (x86/x64) >> indows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/ W x64) >> indows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/ W x64) >>Windows 7 Home Premium (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Ultimate (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Professional (x86/x64) yes yes yes yes yes (TWAIN driver is for network only) yes (TWAIN driver is for network only) yes yes yes >>Windows Vista Home Premium (x86/x64) yes

>>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) yes (TWAIN driver is for network only)

1-14

Item >>Windows 7 Enterprise (x86/x64) >>MacOS >>Linux >>UNIX >Required Disk Space for driver installation Scanner Driver >Scanning System >Document Size setting >Document Type setting >Resolution setting >Image Preview >Scanning area setting >Scan Box >># of boxes >># of documents/box >># of pages/document >>Password >Driver Open Control (Hooters special) Transferring File Format >MH >MR >MMR >JBIG >JPEG >PDF Batch Scan >ON (1 stuck -> 1 file) >Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file) Destinations >Scan to E-mail yes (default) yes no no yes (mono) no yes (color) no yes no no no 10MB and over

Specifications

yes (TWAIN driver, version 1.9) TWAIN: Scan box type yes Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), H-Letter(LEF) no No conversion/400/300/200dpi (default: No conversion) yes no yes 30 99 9999 yes no (no real-time-TWAIN support)

>Scan to Folder

>Scan to FTP

>Scan to User ScanTag Function Create PDF file with Password lock

Select from AddressBook Direct address input Select from E-mail history LDAP search User Mail Address Select from Folder Shortcut Browse (max. 5 destinations at 1 job) Select from FTP Shortcut Direct link input (max. 5 destinations at 1 job) Select from OfficeBridge Users yes (Type A, B, C, D) yes Encryption algorithm: RC4 40bit/128bit, AES(default: RC4 40bit) Authority: print, edit, copy yes 10/100Mbps (Auto-Detection) MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

I-FAX Basic Function Support for Network Data Format

1-15

Item Transmission protocol Reception protocol Communication speed Encoding Document Size Communication standard Simple mode Full mode Resolution

Specifications SMTP/ESMTP SMTP/POP3 Max.100Mbps MIME/Base64 A3/B4/A4 (only A4 from the main unit) ITU-T T.37 yes yes 8dpm3.85lpm (200100dpi) 8dpm7.7lpm (200200dpi) 16dpm15.4lpm (400400dpi) 600600dpi yes yes yes no

Coding method >MH >MR >MMR >JBIG Coding method TIFF-FX >Profile-S(A4/MH/200dpi) >Profile-F(A3/MMR/600dpi) >Profile-J(A3/JBIG/600dpi) >Profile-C (A3/JPEG/600dpi) PDF >Image (BW MMR) >Image (C JPEG) >characters I-FAX Tx Function I-FAX Tx from Application I-FAX Tx by Client User Transmit reservation command file # of Tx Reservation Broadcast # of Locations

yes yes yes no yes no no yes (Use FAX driver) yes (Browser/Panel) Dedicated command file Max 100 (Max. 90 when Archiving setting is ON) 2,030 - 2000(Address Book) - 30(Direct Input) yes 200 (fixed) no no no

Group Tx # of Groups Security S/MIME PGP/MIME Rx E-mail Forward to Fax (Off ramp Gateway) T.37 Standard (FAX=XXX@XXX) Lightning FAX Direct SMTP Transmission Direct DNS SIP Reroute Tx Fax/E-mail mixed Tx Duplex scanning Manual duplex scanning Auto Document Division normal mode (1stack 1file)

yes no yes no no yes yes yes no yes

1-16

Item Page mode(1page 1file) Sheet mode(1Sheet 1file) E-mail resend SMTP Authentication Authentication method I-FAX Rx Function Text E-mail Reception English Other Language Font Mail Rx with the attachment file TIFF-FX Profile-S Profile-F Profile-J Profile-C PDF CCITT Rx by using POP3 Auto Reception/Auto Print Auto Reception/Manual Print Manual Reception APOP Authentication Rx by using SMTP ESMTP Support Access Limitation (Filter) Multiplex communication Printer Driver Paper Size Setting >(Simplex Printing)

Specifications no yes yes yes LOGIN, PLAIN, CRAM-MD5 yes yes Languages supported by Latin1 Bitmap font 1 style (26dot) yes yes yes yes no yes (PDF made by this machine only) yes yes yes (by Received Mail Routing) yes yes yes no yes yes (default 1 session) yes [Cassette] A4(SEF), A5(LEF), F4(SEF) Letter(SEF), Half-Letter(LEF), Legal(SEF) [Bypass Tray] Letter(SEF), HalfLetter(LEF), Legal(SEF), Executive(SEF), A6(SEF), A5(LEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF), DL(SEF), COM#10(SEF), Monarch(SEF), Postcard(SEF), Custom Size (width:3.82-8.50 inches, length:5.51-14.01 inches)

>(Duplex Printing)

[Cassette] A4(SEF), F4(SEF) Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF) [Bypass] Letter(SEF), Legal(SEF), A4(SEF), F4(SEF)

Custom Paper Setting >Size Edit >Name >Short Edge >Long Edge Paper Supply Setting

default: Letter(LEF) yes yes, 50 patterns 20 characters 3.82-8.5 inches 97-216mm 5.51-14.01 inches 140-356mm yes, Auto/Cassette1-2/Bypass Tray

1-17

Item Paper Media Setting

Specifications Yes Plain, Pasteboard, OHP, Envelope/Postcard (Default: Plain) yes yes, (Default: Off) yes *When using paper other than A4, Letter, or Legal size, the machine may not perform the shift sorting function correctly due to environmental variation and paper quality. yes (default) yes yes, On/Off (Default: Off) yes yes, 25% - 400% (1% step) yes yes (2-up/4-up/8-up) yes GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes (default: OFF) yes GDI: no / PCL&PS: yes PC/AT compatible machine

Cover sheet Sort Print >Electric Sort Offset

Resolution >600x600 dpi >300x300 dpi Toner Saving Preset Enlarge/Reduction >1% zoom Fit to Paper Combine Print Duplex Print Watermarks Security Print TrueType Mode Specification of client PC >Support PC, WorkStation >Support OS >>Windows95 (English) >>Windows 98 >>Windows 98 Second Edition >>Windows Millennium Edition >>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a or later) >>Windows 2000 Professional >>Windows XP Home Edition >>Windows XP Professional >>Windows XP Professional x64 Edition >>Windows Vista Home Basic (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Home Premium (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Ultimate (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Business (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition >> indows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 W Edition >> indows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition W >> indows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 W Edition >>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Home Premium (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Ultimate (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Professional (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Enterprise (x86/x64)

no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

1-18

Item >>Mac (10.2, 10.3, 10.4, 10.5) >>Linux

Specifications yes (PS3 w/ PPD only) yes (PS3 w/ PPD only) (RedHat 9, 3, 4, 5/ SUSE 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11/ Fedora 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10/ /Tunbo LinuxFUJI 11/ Debian 4) yes (PCL 5e, PS3) Version: 9 / 10 yes (PCL 5e, PS3) Version: 11i v1/ 11i v1.5 / 11i v1.6 / 11i v2/11i v3 yes (PCL 5e, PS3) Version: 5L 5.3 / 6.1 yes (PCL 5e only) Version:V5R1 / V5R2 / V5R3 / V5R4 / V6R1 Depends on the Operation System Depends on the Operation System 10MB and more

>>Unix >>>Sun Solaris >>>HP-UX >>>AIX

>>>Others >>AS400 >>Citrix >CPU >Required Memory quantity >Required Disk Space for Driver Installation Others >HP PJL Support >Citrix

>Shared Print(Microsoft Point and Print)

>Oracle >SAP

GDI: no / PCL: yes yes Citrix Presentation Server 4.5(XenAPP 4.5) w/ Windows Server 2003 x86 yes (Only STD-TCP/IP) *XPS does not supports the following combinations. **Client: Windows Vista x64 / Server Windows 2008 x64 **Client: Windows 2008 x64 / Server Windows2008 x64 no yes (PCL 5e, PS3) Version:SAP R/3 Enterprise(4.7), SAP ERP 2004, SAP ERP 6.0 yes MMR yes yes yes 256 levels (Dither Matrix) 8 dpm7.7 lpm (200200 dpi)

Fax Driver Fit to Page Coding Method Resolution > 8 dpm7.7 lpm (200200 dpi) > 16 dpm15.4 lpm (400400 dpi) > 24 dpm23.1 lpm (600600 dpi) Halftone Support for OS >Support OS >>Windows95 (English) >>Windows 98 >>Windows 98 Second Edition >>Windows Millennium Edition >>Windows NT 4.0 Workstation (SP6a and later) >>Windows 2000 Professional >>Windows XP Home Edition >>Windows XP Professional >>Windows XP Professional x64 Edition >>Windows Vista Home Basic (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Home Premium (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Ultimate (x86/x64)

no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

1-19

Item >>Windows Vista Business (x86/x64) >>Windows Vista Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition >> indows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 W Edition >>Windows Server 2003 Datacenter Edition >> indows Server 2003 Datacenter x64 W Edition >>Windows Server 2008 Standard (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2008 Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Windows Server 2008 Datacenter (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Home Premium (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Ultimate (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Professional (x86/x64) >>Windows 7 Enterprise (x86/x64) >>Mac >>Linux >>Unix >>>Sun Solaris >>>HP-UX >>>AIX >>>Others >>AS400 >>Citrix Shared Print (Microsoft Point and Print) PC Utility TIFF Maker Cover Page Editor Info Monitor Address Book Setting (OfficeBridge) Address Book Stored Location # of Address Address Book Import/Export >CSV >vCard Group ># of Groups User Information Setting (OfficeBridge) Display/Setting Method User Information Operation >New Registration >Edit >Delete >Forced Delete >Import/Export >vCard Format User Information Item >User Name >User ID >Password yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

Specifications

yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no yes (supported by specific version and settings) yes (Only STD-TCP/IP) (Only Simple Mode) (WindowsOS except Windows2000(Client/Server) yes yes yes yes CF Storage 2,000 yes yes 200 Browser yes (only for Admin.) yes (Admin can edit all users data, but user can edit only his own data.) yes (only for Admin.) yes (only for Admin.) yes (only for Admin.) yes (Name/Company/Fax/E-mail) 64 characters yes 64 characters 28 characters

1-20

Item >Type (Gateway User) >Company >Department Name (User Group Name) >Group Name >TEL >Fax >E-mail Address >LDAP Server Login TCP/IP Settings Setting Method TCP/IP Setting IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address DNS Server Address DNS Suffix DHCP Setting (ON/OFF) Network Environment Initialize MAC Address Display PING SMB Setting NetBIOS Workgroup WINS HTTP Port No. Change HTTPS Port No. Change Client Port No. Change InfoMonitor Port No. Change OfficeBridge Port No. for searching Change RAW port No. Change E-mail Settings (only Admin.) Attachment File Format no 50 characters 100 characters yes 40 digits 40 digits 50 characters yes

Specifications

yes (Control panel/Browser) yes yes yes (max. 1 addresses) yes (max. 2 addresses) yes yes, renew command is supported yes yes yes (Control panel only) yes yes yes yes (max. 1 address) yes yes no no yes yes TIFF-FX(Profile-S) TIFF-FX(Profile-F) PDF MH/MR/MMR/JBIG yes (Control panel/Browser) yes yes yes yes yes no no no no no no no no no no no

Coding Method of TIFF-FX (Profile-F) Archive Settings (only Admin.) Auto Archiving ON/OFF Documents for Archiving Memory Tx Fax PC-Fax Tx Tx I-Fax Memory Rx Fax Rx I-Fax Fax Forward Tx Real-time Tx Fax Manual Tx Fax F-code Secure Box Rx Fax F-code Bulletin Box Rx Fax Polling Rx Fax F-code Polling Rx Fax Polling Tx Fax F-code Polling Tx Fax Scanned Document Print Document

1-21

Item Copy Document Report Tx Canceled Jobs Archiving Destinations E-mail Address Fax Number Folder FTP Address User File Format of archived document Index file of archived documents Data Type Communication Executed Time File Name File Path # of pages Sender Destination Communication Result Archiving setting by user Network Scan Setting (only Admin.) Batch Scan Setting ON (1 stuck -> 1 file) OFF(1 page -> 1 file) Sheet Mode (1 sheet -> 1 file) Storage Period of scanned Document Shortcut Settings Create Folder Short-cut The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity increase Create FTP URL Short-cut The # of shortcut increase by CF quantity increase Initial Settings (only Admin.) File format of preview document TIFF PDF File format of documents downloaded from OfficeBridge (CF) TIFF PDF Delete/Leave documents after download SNMP Agent Setting Setting Method Service Activate ON/OFF Agent Recognition Setting Contact Destination Name Location Security Setting Community Name no no no

Specifications

yes yes yes no no PDF / TIFF-S / TIFF (default: TIFF-S) yes, when the network folder is selected as destination (CSV format, up to 1000 logs in 1 file) yes yes yes yes yes yes yes no no

yes (default) no yes yes,1-99 days/Indefinite (default: 30days) yes (max. 300 short-cuts) no yes (max. 20 short-cuts) no

yes (default) yes

yes (default) yes yes Browser yes yes yes yes yes yes yes - Write: private - Read: public yes Version 1

SNMP Agent Initialize

1-22

Item MIB (Management Information Base) MIB support version Standard MIB Information Private MIB Information LDAP Basic Specification LDAP Supported Version LDAP Operation Search Programmable LDAP Server # of LDAP Server LDAP Setting Parameters Name LDAP Server Name IP Address LDAP Port # Search Base Auto detection of the search starting point # of max. results setting Time Limit Authentication anonymous name name+password Description Search Method LDAP Search Operation Search Method Name Default Name Description1 Default Name Description2 # of characters E-Mail Default E-Mail Description1 Default E-Mail Description2 # of characters Fax # Default Fax Description1 Default Fax Description2 # of characters TEL# Default TEL Description1 Default TEL Description1 # of characters Organization Default Organization Description1 Default Organization Description1 # of characters Company Name Company Name Default1 Company Name Default2 # of characters Search Rule Setting Version.2 Version.3 no yes yes 5 MIB-2

Specifications

yes, 23 characters yes, 99 characters yes yes yes, 99 characters yes yes, 001-100 (default 50) yes, 0000-9999 (default: 0000 = Unlimited) yes yes yes yes, 49 characters Any, Initial, Final, Equal, Not Use

yes cn commonname 49 characters yes mail 49 characters yes facsimileTelephoneNumber 49 characters yes telephonenumber 49 characters no N/A N/A N/A yes company o 49 characters yes Default setting

1-23

Item Search Key Rule Setting Equal Initial Final Any Not Equal Not Any Exist Not Use Operation Interface MFP Control Panel Browser via network Supported character codes US ASCII UTF-8 Supported directory servers Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2000 server (ENG) Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2003 server (ENG) Active directory on Microsoft Windows 2008 server (ENG) Novell e-Directory on Windows 2000 server(ENG) OpenLDAP on LINUX(ENG) Supported Authentication Servers Windows NT 4.0 Server SP4 later Windows 2000 Server(Active Directory) Windows Server 2003(Active Directory) Windows Server 2008(Active Directory) Supported Protocol for Authentication Windows NT 4.0 Server Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003/ Windows Server 2008 Kerberos Basic Functions Encryption Type Renewal of Tickets Cache of Tickets Clock Synchronization Method LDAP Basic Functions for MFP Authentication SASL Support Search Filter yes yes yes yes (default) no no no yes yes yes(Multi Clients) yes yes (Shift JIS, Latin1) yes yes yes no yes no yes yes yes N/A Kerberos v5

Specifications

RC4 HMAC no no SNTP version1 GSSAPI(only Network Authentication) (UserPrincipalName=<user>@<domain>) <user> : user name <domain> : domain name displayName The domain at each level is specified by dc=. yes N/A DNS no yes

Search Attributes Search Start Point Auto detection of the search starting point Search Method of Authentication Server Windows NT 4.0 Server Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 Authentication of Domain with Mutual Trust Windows NT 4.0 Server Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003

1-24

Item Mail Address Relation Acquisition of User Mail Address Windows NT 4.0 Server Windows 2000 Server/Windows Server 2003 Use of Mail Address of Equipment From Format Network Authentication Settings Automatic Logout Function Support Range of Automatic Logout Time Default Automatic Logout Time Number of characters that can be input User Name Password Domain Name Windows NT Server Active Directory User Authentication MFP Control Panel Browser via network PC-Print PC-FAX TWAIN Optional Kits Paper supply unit Handset Printer controller kit PostScript3 Kit Barcode/OCR Font PS3 & Barcode/OCR Font Mechanical counter Expandable CF Memory for Network board Expandable CF Memory for PCL board (for PDF Direct Print) Foreign Device Interface Confirmation stamp

Specifications

no yes When the user mail address was not able to be acquired. displayName<mail> or cn<mail> yes 1-10 (minites) 3 (minites) 64 28 255 N/A 255 yes yes yes yes no yes, Universal type yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes (Option)

1-25

2 Machine Composition
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence
2.1.1 Auto Document Feeder (ADF) Section
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) is a device that feeds the document continuously one page by one to the scanning section automatically. It consists mainly of document tray, Tx cover, inner guide, and platen cover. When the device is categorized by its functions, it consists of separator section that picks up each page of documents, register section that detects the leading edge of the document and controls the timing so that the document does not skew, and scan section that scans the document.

6 7

16 17 18 19 20 21 22 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Part name Press roller DS2 sensor Feed roller Separate roller Separate pad Pickup roller DS1 sensor Exit roller Mirror A Mirror C Mirror A Lens No. Part name 13 Home sensor 14 Mirror B 15 CCD 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 CCD Mirror Lens Reflect tape Lamp Mirror Mirror

Document insert section / separator section

The machine scans up to letter paper size document width. Place the document to the center of the document tray and align the document guide. By pressing the start key through copy or transmission commands, the motor starts driving, and the driving force is transferred to the pick up roller through gears, and the document will be fed. Document separator section consists mainly of separate roller and separate pad. The document will be fed from the upper pages. Remaining documents are separated by the friction of the separate pad and only the top page will fed by the separate roller.

2-1

Register section
Following the document separation, the separate roller transfers the document to register section. During this transfer, clutch 2 (CL2) which drives the register roller is turned off and the document leading edge stops at the register roller. The separate roller feeds the document forward, and that prevents the document to skew. The document sensor (DRS) is placed between the separator section and the register roller to detect the leading edge of the document. When the document leading edge passes the sensor and the loop is made, clutch 1 (CL1) runs idle (turns off) and clutch 2 runs (turns on) and the register roller transfers the document to the scan position

Original Detection
The sizes of the documents are detected by the following sensors; Detection Document presence Action Detects whether there is a document on the tray or not Detects the leading and trailing edge of the feeding document Sensor DS1

Leading and trailing edge detection

DS2 DS3 (Back side) DRS

Scanning section
The document sensor (DS2) is placed at scanning position to detect the leading edge and trailing edge of the document. When the leading edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain steps where the scanning begins. When the trailing edge is detected, the feed roller transfers the document a certain steps where the scanning ends. If the document has two or more pages, feeding of the next page begins when the former page scanning ends, and the page is scanned in the same way. The steps where scanning begins can be adjusted with machine parameter 013, and the steps where scanning ends by machine parameter 014.

2-2

2.1.2 Flat Bed Scannser (FBS) section

The FBS (Flat Bed Scanner) section consists of document glass (pane), optical reading section, scanner frame Assy, and scanner driving section. A lamp (White light LED array) is on the scanner frame, and the light reflected from the document passes through four mirrors and a lends to form a reduced image on CCD sensor as the scanner motor moves the scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern (image data) into an electrical image signal.

Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

During scanning, the scanner frame projects an even amount of light from the exposure lamp onto the entire surface of the document. The light is reflected from the original to the mirror through the lens to the CCD. The scanner frame is driven by the FBS motor and scanner drive belts. The scanner frame driving speed is determined by zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode. It is at home position where ADF scanning begins. The home sensor watches this position.

6 5 4
No. Part name 1 FBS motor 2 Lamp (LED) 3 Scanner frame

No. Part name 4 Lens 5 CCD PCB 6 Home sensor

2-3

Exposure Section: Construction and Function

3
1 Reflector tape The reflector tape reflects the light from the exposure lamp and supplements its illumination. This helps to lighten the shadow that is made when copying a document not touching the document glass such as a opened book. 2 Exposure lamp A white LED array is used to illuminate the document. 3 Mirror A Directs the reflected light from the document to the lends.

2-4

2.2 Recording Section

Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup roller. The paper is fed along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller. Then it is fed by the rotation of the register roller.

At duplex printing, the paper is transferred to the exit when the first side of paper is printed. After a few steps after the PDS and DPS sensor detecte the paper trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers. The paper reaches to the image transfer area inside out, and the second side of the paper is printed.

2-5

Finisher mechanism
When finishing the printouts using the shift sort function, every second set of printout will be shifted 1 inch off to the horizontal direction of paper and ejected on the tray.

Paper exit direction

Shift direction (1 inch)

When the trailing edge of paper is nipped only by exit roller pair, the shift motor drives, and the exit roller pair will be shifted to the shift position. After the paper ejection, the exit roller pair return to their original position. The machine detects that the rollers have returned to their original position by the shift sensor.

No. Part name 1 Shift sensor (Shift motor home position detection sensor) 2 Exit roller pair 3 Shift motor

2-6

2.3 Image Processing

The image processing is roughly divide into the following steps: 1. Drum Charging 2. Drum Exposure 3. Development 4. Image transfer 5. Fusing 6. Erasing 7. Cleaning

Drum charging Cleaning Exposure

Fusing

Drum

Eraser Lamp Image transfer

Development

2.3.1 Drum Charge

The Drum is charged with corona discharge before LED exposure. A charge wire and a charge grid are used for the charging method. The corona discharge generates little ozone in the printer. It also keeps the wire from becoming dirty. Because the discharge, the Drum can be charged evenly.

2.3.2 Drum Exposure

The light makes an invisible static image from the LED print head. The LED print head, located inside the printer cover, closes down over the drum and projects light onto the drum surface. When the document is to be printed, individual elements in the LED print head turn on and expose the drum wherever a dark area should appear in the document.

2-7

2.3.3 Development
Toner is applied to the invisible static image on the Drum and a toner image is created on the surface.

Toner agitator Drum

Developing roller Toner supply roller

Part Name Toner Agitator Toner supply Roller Developing Roller Drum Function Agitates toner. Transports the toner to the developing roller. Carries the toner to the Drum surface for development. Exposed by LED light to create an invisible image and rotates to carry the developed image to the paper surface.

1 2 3 4

2.3.4 Image Transfer

Image transfer is the process of transferring the toner image created on the Drum in the developing process to paper. In the Roller Image Transfer, there is little generation of ozone due to corona discharge. Also, there is no blur of toner because the paper is always pressed by the Drum and the Image Transfer Roller.

Image transfer roller PC Drum High voltage unit - output

2-8

2.3.5 Erasing
An LED lamp exposes the Drum surface. When it is exposed the drum charge erases. This helps the drum to be recharged evenly at the next step of charging.

Drum

LED Lamp

2.3.6 Cleaning
The residual toner or paper dust must be removed from the drum. Paper dust is removed from the drum surface by a rubber roller. And then by a metallic roller, and finally scraped off. The residual toner is removed by the developing roller and toner supply roller, and is recycled.

Cleaning

Drum

Development

2-9

2.3.7 Fusing
An Overview
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed. A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The toner image is fused by Heater Roller heated by the Heater Lamp, and securely fixed by the pressure between the Heater roller and Press rollers. A Thermistor detects and controls the Heater Roller temperature. The Thermostat functions when the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunction.

Press roller

Exit roller

Paper separate blade Thermistor

Heater lamp Heater roller

Press roller

2-10

Fusing Temperature Control Circuit

The Thermistor detects the surface temperature of the Heater Roller and inputs that analog voltage into the Main Control PCB. Corresponding to this data, the Heater Lamp ON/OFF signal is output to the Heater ON/OFF switch of the power supply unit, causing the Heater Lamp to turn ON or OFF to control the fusing temperature. When the Heater Lamp is not turned OFF even if the Thermistor detects a high temperature malfunction, the thermostat shuts down the power to the heater lamp. When the thermostat is malfunction, the thermal cut-off shuts down the power to the heater lamp.
AC Inlet
N L

Power supply unit

Heater on/off switch

Main Control PCB

Fusing temperature control circuit

Main switch Fusing unit

Thermistor Heater Lamp

Thermostat

Thermal cut-off

Fusing temperature 1) Warming Up After the initialization of the printer, warming up of the printer starts and the Heater Lamp turns ON until the temperature of the Heater Roller reaches approx. 140 C. When the printer obtains the printing command from its controller, the Heater Roller is maintained at 170, 185 or 206 C . After printing, the printer turns to ready mode. The fuser kept at low temperature. The Heater Roller maintained at approx. 110 C.

2) Printing

3) Ready

4) Energy save mode In this mode, saving the power. Temperature ( F) ( C) 206 402 185 365 338 170

Post card, envelope, or transparency Small size paper (A5 and half-letter)

230

110

Warming up Power ON

Printing

Ready mode

Energy save mode

Time

2-11

2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram

2010.02.24

P18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 HVTR HVTS HVTN HVTP HVBS HVBN HVRLR HVLMT HVCP GND GND +24VF (B to B) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DA7-08360-50 DA7-08370-50

CLEANING1(HV) CLEANING2(HV) DEVELOPER1(HV) DEVELOPER2(HV) CHARGER(HV) GRID(HV) TRANSFER(HV)

FAX FRAME/ DC41030010

PCB PSU HV
Z90-48829-00

DA7-08380-50 DA7-08390-50 DA7-08410-50 DA7-08420-50 DA7-08430-50

CN201

XH

3P INLET
AC SWITCH

PCB PSU100U_DC4
DC4-08900-50 CN202 or

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PCON HT1 HT2 +24VP +24VP +24V +24V GND GND

XAD

P3

24 24 22 22 20 20 18 18 16 16 14 14 12 12 10 10 8 8

XH

1 PCB 2 3 PSU200E_DC4

DC4-Y8900-50 160x197

FUSER HEATER (100V)

ZA1-03615-80

1 2 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15

+12V +12V +12V GND GND GND +5V +5V GND GND +3VA +3VA GND GND GND

6 6 4 4 2 2 23 23 21 21 19 19 17 17 15 15 13 13 11 11 9 9 7 7 5 5 3 3 1 1

P72

P51A

SHD

Thermostat
ZA1-03645-60

CN101

12 12

Fuse
Z90-48827-00

1 1 DC4-08560-50

2 2

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20

+12VB +12VB +12VB +12VB +24VA +24VA +3V +3V PSKEY GND SUBSW GND GND GND RXSIG GND PSLED MUTE_MAIN BUZZ_MAIN +3VZ

SHD

P4

P60

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20

P3

BL INVERTER Z07-94569-00 TOUCH PANEL

FPC

P43

P12

40

LCD MODULE
FFC

PCB PANEL
DC1-08021-50
P2
2

8.5inch Color TFT LCD Z07-94571-00

ASSY SPEAKER 200x132

P59
20

P5B
CT PH

PH

PH

P13

TRAYS Z08-05572-00

1 1 2 2 3 3

/TRYS GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

NC VBUS DD+ GND F.G (USB)

P6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 P52
30

PCB PANEL KEY1

DC1-08030-50 123x137

CT

PRINTER FRAME / DC41050010

PSS Z08-05572-00
CZ

1 1 2 2 3 3

/PSS GND +5V +24VC /TRYCL +24VC /PFCL +24VC /RESCL +24VC /ERS

4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15

P51 P51B 1 2 3 4 5
PH PH

18

PCB PANEL KEY2

DC1-08040-50 36.8x137

P70 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

51006(molex)

TRYCL Z90-56069-00 PFCL Z90-48683-00

1 1 2 2 3 3
TR

1 2

1 2 3 4 5

2 1 1 2

CZ

51006(molex)

RESCL Z90-56069-00

1 1 2 2 3 3
PH TR

1 2

DC4-08010-50

PCB ERS LAMP 1 DA7-08170-50 2 10x236

1 2

1 2 2 1

270.5x220

CT

PH

P14

OPEN1 Z08-05572-00

11 22 33
CT

/OPEN1 GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

PES1 Z08-05572-00

1 1 2 2 3 3
PH

/PES1 GND +5V

4 4 5 5 6 6

TS1 (PCB TOS)1 D88-09060-50 2 3 18x51 4 TS2 (PCB TOS) 1 D88-09060-50 2 3 18x51 4

1 2 3 4
PH

+5V TS1 GND NC

7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10

1 2 3 4

+5V TS2 GND NC

11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14

PH

PH

P15

CASSETTE(2ND) / DC41240010

OPEN2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/OPEN2 GND +5V

1 1 2 2 3 3

PH

PES2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/PES2 GND +5V

4 4 5 5 6 6

PH

JAMC2 Z90-37777-50

1 1 2 2 3 3
TR

/JAMC2 GND +5V

7 7 8 8 9 9

10 10 11 11

1 1 2 2

+24VC 1 2 /COUNT DCB-D0216-50A 2 1

COUNTER Z90-35223-50

2-12

PRINTER FRAME / DC41050010

Option

PFCL2 Z90-48683-00

2 1 1 2

+24VC /PFCL2

P16 PH

TR

PANEL / DC41020010

PCB MAIN

VBUS DD+ GND F.G (USB)

P71

USB (host)

PRINTER FRAME / DC41050010

2010.02.24

SM30BSRDS-GTF

08-6212030-340800+

P910

P920 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 GND CLK+ CLKGND GND /STB GND /RST GND /PWRDOWN GND ROM SCLK ROM SDA ROM VCC DATA15 DATA16 DATA14 DATA17 DATA13 DATA18 DATA12 DATA19 DATA11 DATA1A DATA10 DATA1B VDD VDD VDD VDD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

P1

HS Z08-05572-00
3 1 1 2 2 3
CT CT

SH SH

P2

P1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 RS GND CP GND PHI2 GND PHI1 GND TG1 /HS RLED GND +24VA +24VA +24VA GND +5VA +5VA +5VA LHS AGND 10V 10V AGND RED AGND GREEN AGND BLUE AGND 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

P4

PCB CCD
DC4-08060-50 181x32

4 4 5 5 6 6

/DUPS GND LDUPS

1 1 2 2 3 3
CT

DUPS Z08-05572-00

30FMN-BMT-A-TF(LF)(SN) (JST)

04 6232 130 015 800+(ELCO)

FBS / DC41010010

PCB SCANNER
DC4-08020-50

PCB MAIN
DC4-08010-50

7 7 8 8 9 9

/PDS GND LPDS

1 1 2 2 3 3
SM

PDS Z08-05572-00 COVER-SW Interlock24V (ASSY INTERLOCK) DA7-08310-40

DVLPTYPE1 DVLPTYPE2 LFCUTDV /FCUTDV LFCUTDR /FCUTDR /DRUMSET

10 10 11 11 12 12

+24VC +24VF

1 1 2 2

P3 1 1 2 2

04-6232-130-015-800+ (ELCO) SH SH

04-6232-130-015-800+ (ELCO)

P94

EH

220x55

270.5x220
P2 P9
SHD
SHD SHD

1 1

P6B
SHD SHD SHD SHD

SHD

P90

PCB LPH

24VB /FLED

2 2 3 3 4 4

1 1 2 2

SH SH

SHD SHD

PCB LED-LAMP FBS DC4-08110-50

P3
EH EH

FBS MOTOR

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

/MFBS_B MFBS_B /MFBS_A MFBS_A

EH EH

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30

+24VA +24VA +24VA +24VA GND GND GND GND +12VB +12VB GND GND GND GND GND GND +5VA +5VA GND GND +3VB +3VB +3VB GND GND GND /RST /INT0022F SCNPWRE3 GND

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40

+1.2V PCLK(P) NC(PCLK_N) GND +2.5V PDATA(N) NC(PDATA_P) GND PTRG PEN THTMP +3V GND +3V /RESET FPGACLKE GND +5V +5V +5V /TOP GND GND SCLK STXD SRXD /WR_FPGA /INT_FPGA /CS_FPGA GND +24VC +24VC +24VC +24VC GND GND GND GND +24VF GND

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40

DC4-08080-50 111x87

5 5 6 6 7 7

P95

PH

TR

1 1 2 2 3 3

3 1 2 2 1 3

+24VC /FMLOCK GND

1 FAN 80mm 2 3 ZA1-03792-80

P96

PH

TR

1 1 2 2

+3V THTMP

1 2 2 1

Fusing thermistor Z90-55856-00

P97 1 2 3 4 5 6

PH

1 2 3 4 5 6

MDUP_A MDUP_B /MDUP_A /MDUP_B +24VF +24VF

1 2 3 4 5 6

DUP MOTOR ZA1-03598-10

P98 1 2 3 4

PH

CT

1 2 3 4

/JAMC1 GND LJAMC1

1 1 2 2 3 3

JAMC1 Z08-05572-00

P99 1 2 3 4 5

PH

1 2 3 4 5

/MSHT_A MSHT_B MSHT_A /MSHT_B +24VC

1 2 3 4 5

SHIFT MOTOR ZA1-03791-60

2-13

PRINTER FRAME / DC41050010

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

GND GND SCKI1P SCKI1N GND GND SDTI1P SDTI1N GND GND SRGIP SRGIN GND GND SDTO1P SDTO1N GND GND SCKO1P SCKO1N GND GND SRGOP SRGON GND GND DIFCLKFP DIFCLKFN GND GND

P6A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

DATA1B DATA10 DATA1A DATA11 DATA19 DATA12 DATA18 DATA13 DATA17 DATA14 DATA16 DATA15 ROM_VCC ROM_SDA ROM_SCLK /PWRDOWN /RST /STB GND GND VDD VDD GND CLKCLK+ GND N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C.

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30

PCB CONN LPH

DC4-08100-50 59x47

LED HEAD

Z90-66467-00

LHS /HS GND

PHD

P91

P92 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

EH

EH

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

GND +24VF /MTEN /MLOCK MTDIR MTCLK

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 1 2 2 3 3

RX MOTOR Z90-66621-00

P93 1 1 2 2 3 3

EH CT

/HP GND LHP

1 1 2 2 3 3
CT

HP Z08-05572-00

P9

SHD SHD

P2 AD26 AD25 AD24 AD23 AD22 AD21 AD20 AD19 AD18 GND AD17 AD16 AD15 AD14 AD13 AD12 AD11 AD10 GND AD9 AD8 AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 GND
SHD SHD

2010.02.24

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 P8
SHD SHD

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 P1
501571 501571

DS3 DC1-08130-5*
1 1 2 2 3 3 1 1 2 2 3 3 P3 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 RS GND CP GND PHI2 GND PHI1 GND TG1 /DS3 RLED GND +24VA +24VA +24VA GND +5VA +5VA +5VA LDS3 AGND 10V 10V AGND RED AGND GREEN AGND BLUE AGND 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 P1 LDS3 /DS3 GND
SH SH PH PH

P2

P7
DF11 DF11 (FG)

EH EH

DC4-08010-50
P83

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ADF MOTOR

P2
DF11 DF11

P7

PH PH

270.5x220

DF11 DF11

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32

+24VA +24VA +24VA GND GND GND GND /MADF_B MADF_B /MADF_A MADF_A +12VB GND GND GND +5VA +5VA GND GND /APS /DS1 /DS2 /INT0022R +5VC GND +3VB +3VB GND N.C /RST /DRS /DS3

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32

1 1 2 2

+24VA R_CLUTCH

1 2 2 1

DCLCRE Z90-63337-00

3 3 4 4

+24VA S_CLUTCH

1 2 2 1

DCLCSE Z90-63337-00

5 5 6 6 7 7

/TXIL GND LTXIL

CT CT

1 1 2 2 3 3

TXIL Z08-05572-00

ORANGE
8 8 9 9 1010 P6
PH PH

/DS1 GND LDS1

CT CT

BLUE
LDS2 /DS2 GND

1 1 2 2 3 3
PH PH

DS1 Z08-05572-00

1 1 2 2 3 3 P4

1 1 2 2 3 3

DS2 DC1-08130-5*

PH PH

1 1 2 2 3 3

/APS GND LAPS

CT CT

1 1 2 2 3 3

APS Z08-05572-00

4 4 5 5

+24VA /STAMP

1 2 2 1

1 1 2 2

STAMP

Option

2-14

ADF / DC41000010

PCB MAIN

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16

+24VA 1 1 +24VA 2 2 GND 3 3 +12VB 4 4 +12VB 5 5 GND 6 6 +5VA 7 7 +5VA 8 8 GND 9 9 +3VB 10 10 +3VB 11 11 GND 12 12 MCLK 13 13 GND 14 14 SHD 15 15 GND 16 16 SHP 17 17 GND 18 18 19 19 LCLP1 LCLP2 20 20 21 21 /AGC_ON /RST 22 22 23 23 AKCLK 24 24 AKDIN 25 25 /AKENB AKDO 26 26 DC4-08040-50 27 27 GND RS 28 28 GND 29 29 CP P1 30 30 GND 31 31 DF11 DF11 206.5x66 PHI1 32 32 SCKI1P 1 1 GND 33 33 SCKI1N 2 2 PHI2 34 34 SDTI1P 3 3 GND 35 35 SDTI1N 4 4 TG1 36 36 SRGIP 5 5 DRS 37 37 SRGIN 6 6 RLED 38 38 SCKO1P 7 7 /DS3 39 39 SCKO1N 8 8 LDS3 40 40 SDTO1P 9 9 SDTO1N 10 10 SRGOP 11 11 P3 SRGON EH EH 12 12 /MADF_B DIFCLKRP 13 13 1 1 MADF_B DIFCLKRN 14 2 2 14 /MADF_A 3 3 MADF_A 4 4

1 1 2 2 P4
SH SH CT CT

+24VA /RLED
SH SH

PCB RADF

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40

PCB R-SCANNER
DC4-08030-50

PCB CCD
DC4-08060-50 181x32

90x56.3

30FMN-STRK(JST)

1 1 2 2

04-6232-130-015-800 (ELCO)

P3
SH SH

PCB LED-LAMP DC4-08120-50

1 1 2 2 3 3

/DRS GND LDRS

1 1 2 2 3 3

DRS Z08-05572-00

2010.02.24

P4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 +3.3V +3.3V GND Vcc Vcc GND /SHTDWN /PCIINTX /INTB /INTA /INTD /INTC PWE1 Vcc PCICLK_S UNIQ GND GND PCICLK +3.3V GND /PCIRST /REQ /MRES PWE2 /GNT PAD31 GND PAD30 +3.3V GND PAD29 PAD27 PAD28 PAD25 PAD26 Vcc GND CBE3 PAD24 PAD23 PAD19 GND Vcc PAD21 PAD22 PAD19 PAD20 Vcc GND PAD17 PAD18 CBE2 PAD16 /IRDY Vcc /DEVSEL /FRAME GND /TRDY /SDWRDY /STOP Vcc Vcc /PERR GND /SERR PAR GND PAD15 CBE1 PAD14 PAD12 PAD13 PAD11 GND PAD10 PAD9 GND CBE0 PAD8 Vcc PAD7 PAD6 PAD5 PAD4 PAD3 GND GND PAD2 PAD1 PAD0 IDSEL_S /REQ_S /GNT_S NMI UNIQ +24VC +24VC GND (B to B)

P11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

270.5x220

P7

RJ45

[OP-700]

PCB ASSY PDL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Enabler Z90-65708-00

Option

Compact Flash Memory card ZA1-03537-30

(B to B)

2-15

FAX FRAME / DC41030010

1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 Compact Flash 37 13 Memory card 38 14 ZA1-03538-50 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50

GND /CD1 D3 D11 D4 D12 D5 D13 D6 D14 D7 D15 /CE1 /CE2 A10 /VS1 /ATASEL /IORD A9 /IOWR A8 /WE A7 INTRQ VCC VCC A6 /CSEL A5 /VS2 A4 /RESET A3 IORDY A2 /INPACK A1 /REG A0 /DASP D0 /PDIAG D1 D8 D2 D9 /IOIS16 D10 CD2 GND

P6 1 26 2 27 3 28 4 29 5 30 6 31 7 32 8 33 9 34 10 35 11 36 12 37 13 38 14 39 15 40 16 41 17 42 18 43 19 44 20 45 21 46 22 47 23 48 24 49 25 50

P81

PH

1 1 2 2

GND BATT

P12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 +3.3V +3.3V GND Vcc Vcc GND /SHTDWN /PCIINTX /INTB /INTA /INTD /INTC PWE1 Vcc PCICLK_S PCKE GND GND PCICLK +3.3V GND /PCIRST /REQ /MRES PWE2 /GNT PAD31 GND PAD30 +3.3V GND PAD29 PAD27 PAD28 PAD25 PAD26 Vcc GND CBE3 PAD24 PAD23 IDSEL GND Vcc PAD21 PAD22 PAD19 PAD20 Vcc GND PAD17 PAD18 CBE2 PAD16 /IRDY Vcc /DEVSEL /FRAME GND /TRDY /SDWRDY /STOP Vcc Vcc /PERR GND /SERR PAR GND PAD15 CBE1 PAD14 PAD12 PAD13 PAD11 GND PAD10 PAD9 GND CBE0 PAD8 Vcc PAD7 PAD6 PAD5 PAD4 PAD3 GND GND PAD2 PAD1 PAD0 IDSEL_S /REQ_S /GNT_S UNIQ CHKR +12V +12V GND

P5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 DC6-08011-40 53 54 176x90 55 56 57 58 59 IC4 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 P2 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

FAX FRAME / DC41030010

PCB IS DC5-08210-50 204x178

PCB MAIN
DC4-08010-50

2010.02.24

PHD

PHD

P4

LINE

TEL1

TEL2 FAX FRAME/ DC41030010

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 DA7-Y8040-50 13 13 or 14 14 15 15 16 16 DA7-08040-50 17 17 18 18 19 19 75x140 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

PCB NCU

(EUR)

(USA)

+24VA DP +24VA CML GND L GND H +5VC S +5VC RI RXA CONT24 +12VA /OH1 TXA /OH2 GND /CI AREF /DSE2 CNG /DSE1 GND NC

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26

PCB MAIN
DC4-08010-50

270.5x220

1 2 3 4

FDI
1-480425-0

1 2 3 4

SET GND C(K)DRIVE +24VC

EH

P19 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

Option

P2

USB

2-16

2.5 Circuit board constructions

PCB MAIN PCB PDL PCB LPH Motor Driver PCB IS PCB NCU DFX336 MODEM USB HOST Audio PCB PANEL PANEL Color LCD SPEAKER Motor Driver MAIN MOTOR SHIFT DUPLEX

FPGA LPH I/F

PCB CONN LPH

PRINTER UNIT
LPH

PCI Bus

System Bus

MD0021 SYSTEM ASIC COMM Enc./Dec. RES.CONV PRINTER RES.CONV Layout/Dec. Motor Driver Ni-MH battery
DDR SDRAM

PCB RADF PCB R-SCANNER AFE STAMPER

PCB LED-LAMP PCB CCD Color CCD

SH7203 CPU COUNTER HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY FLASH ROM 128Mb SDRAM 64x2Mb Heater LAMP SRAM (*2) 1Mb

MD0022 IMAGE PROCESSING DDR 64MBx3

PCI I/F

DDR SDRAM CONTROL +DMAC

128MB

(*1)

ADF MOTOR PCB SCANNER Motor Driver FBS MOTOR PCB CCD Color CCD PCB LED-LAMP

SYS DMAC

SYS I/F USB Func

MD0022 I/F IMAGE

AFE MD0022 IMAGE PROCESSING DDR 64MBx3

POWER SUPPLY

Lithium battery

PROCESSING

Layout/Enc.

(*1) Connected to the Ni-MH battery (*2) Connected to the Lithium battery

Main control board

This board controls the MFP system. By inserting the USB memory stick, firmware can be updated. The main devices mounted on the main control board and their functions are as follows: CPU MD0021 This performs the firmware. This controls the high voltage power board. This controls the memory. This controls the scanner motor. This edits the image such as rotation, mirroring, or n-in-1. This transfers the serial image date to LPH board. This performs the USB functions. This has G3 and Super G3 communication function. FLASH memory he FLASH memory stores program data, background level data, and other T parameters. SRAM he SRAM stores user registered data. It is backed up by a lithium battery. T he data will be cleared by removing the jumper pin JP2. T SDRAM he SDRAM is for following use. It is backed up by a Ni-MH battery on the T main control board: 1) tores program data; When the machine is turned on, CPU opS eration data is copied from FLASH memory on SDRAM, and then executed from the SDRAM. 2) Stores encoded image data. 3) Works as temporary communication memory. This controls the USB HOST function.

Modem Memory section

USB controller

2-17

Scanner board
It detects the FBS sensor signal. It controls the motor drivers. It drives the FBS motor. It controls the CCD. It offsets the image signal (analogue signal) from the CCD, then adjusts gain, converts AD, and processes the image data. When MD 0022 has processed color or monochrome image, it codes the data and transmits to the main control board.

RADF board
It detects the DADF sensor signals. It controls the CCD. When MD 0022 has processed color or monochrome image, it codes the data and transmits to the main control board.

R-Scanner board
It offsets the image signal (analogue signal) from the CCD, then adjusts gain, converts AD, and processes the image data.

CCD board
This board is mounted with color 600dpi CCD for letter-size. The CCD device scans the document, and transmits the image data signal (analog signal) to scanner board.

LPH (LED Printer Head) board / LPH connection board

It detects the printer sensor signal. It controls the clutches. It converts the print serial data received from main control board to a data format for the LED head, then transmits it to the LED. It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density.

Panel board
This is a key input board that equips 8.5 inch Wide VGA LCD. It controls the panel key and LCD touch key.

Network board
This controls the network interface. It has the OfficeBridge function.

Printer Description Language (PDL) board

This rasterizes print data transmitted from the computer, as the main control board cannot do it.

2-18

Low-voltage power board

It consists of four blocks: primary control, secondary control, heater control, and flicker control. The secondary output voltages are +24.0 VDC, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC. The +24.0 VDC is for transformer control, +12.0 VDC, +5.0 VDC, and +3.3 VDC are for DC/DC control. AC inputs is turned off and on by an AC switch at an inlet. It equips an overvoltage and overcurrent protection circuit. It equips a heater driving circuit for the fuser. Output is 750 W / 100VAC.
INLET
L N

SW FUSE F1 LINE FILTER RECTIFIVATION / LEVEL

CONTOL DC/DC +12V RECTIFIVATION / LEVEL

OUTPUT CN201 P-CON HC1 HC2

+24. 0V FUSE F201

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

FUSE F202

HEATER CONTOL 1 CONTOL IC HEATER CONTOL 2

CONTOL +24V P- C N O

OUTPUT CN202 CONTOL DC/DC +12V

+12. 0V FUSE F203

FUSE F101

CN 101

1 2 3 7 8

OUTPUT HEATER CN101

PC 1A

CONTOL DC/DC +5V

+5. 0V

CONTOL DC/DC +3V

PC 2A

+3. 3V

11 12 4 5 6 9 10 13 14 15

PT102

HC1

PT101

HC2

High-voltage power board

This board generates high-voltage power required for electrophotographic system ; charge, developing, transfer, and cleaning sections. In charging section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the wire in the drum unit in order to charge the drum surface positive. It monitors the charge condition through the wire condition. Also it charges the mesh grid electrode at the opening of charger in order to make the drum charge potential even. In developing section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the developing roller and supply roller in the developing unit in order to transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum. The control of output voltage is made by an analogue signal. In transfer section, it generates negative voltage which is applied to the transfer roller in order to transfer the toner on the drum to paper. The control of output voltage is made by an analogue signal. Also generates positive voltage when cleaning the transfer roller. In cleaning section, it generates positive voltage which is applied to the cleaning roller and cleaning shaft in order to collect paper dust on the drum.

2-19

Network Control Unit (NCU) board

The NCU board provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring signal detector and telephone control circuit.

Major components of the NCU DP relay Connects the telephone line to the fax. S relay Used to connect the telephone line at seizure state. OH & Tone detector Detects the On-hook condition of the Phone 1 and Phone 2. H relay Disconnects the Phone 1 and Phone 2 line from PSTN. 24V generator Supplies 24 volts to the relays for OH detection of Phone 1 or Phone 2. Ring signal detector A photo coupler that detects an incoming ring.

2-20

2.6 Sensors
2.6.1 Sensor Locations
The following illustration shows the relative positions of the machines sensors.

HS PES1 TS2

TS1 JAMC2

OPEN2

PES2

DS3 Shift

APS

DRS DS2 DS1

COVER-SW PDS

TXIL DPS JAMC1

Thermistor OPEN1

PSS

TRAYS

2-21

2.6.2 Sensor Descriptions

The following table gives a brief description of each sensor and its function. Code Name Detects Sensor Type DS1 Document sensor 1 Presence of document in feeder Photo interrupter DS2 Document sensor 2 Leading and trailing edge of Reflector document DS3 Document sensor 3 Leading edge of document on Reflector back side. DRS Document register sen- Leading edge of document. Photo interrupter sor APS ADF permit sensor Platen cover quite close or not Photo interrupter HS Mirror carriage home Mirror carriage position Photo interrupter position sensor TXIL Interlock switch Scanner cover open or close Mechanical Switch COVER Cover switch Detects front cover and the first Mechanical Switch cassette jam access cover are open or close PDS Paper discharge sensor Detects paper pass at paper exit Photo interrupter DPS Duplex paper sensor Detects paper pass of the duplex Photo interrupter printing paper OPEN1 Paper cassette open Detects the first paper cassette Photo interrupter sensor open or close PES1 Paper empty sensor Detects presence of recording Photo interrupter paper in the first paper cassette TS1 Toner sensor 1 Detects the toner empty for small Photo interrupter capacity toner cartridge TS2 Toner sensor Detects the toner empty for large Photo interrupter capacity toner cartridge PSS Paper supply sensor Detects paper feeding out of cas- Photo interrupter sette/tray TRAYS Tray sensor Detects presence of recording Photo interrupter paper in the bypass tray JAMC1 Jam access cover sen- Detects the side cover open or Photo interrupter sor close Shift Shift sensor The exit roller position. Photo interrupter PES2 OPEN2 JAMC2 Paper empty sensor Paper cassette open sensor Jam access cover sensor Detects presence of recording paper in the 2nd paper cassette Detects the 2nd paper cassette open or close Detects the 2nd paper cassette side cover open or close Photo interrupter Photo interrupter Photo interrupter

2-22

2.7 Function detail and additional information

2.7.1 Port setting list
Application Info Monitor Detail New arrival notification to InfoMonitor New arrival inquiry from InfoMonitor User list acquisition / User authentication Cover page list acquisition Cover page data upload Printer registration on MFP Document list data acquisition Image data download from MFP Test printing for Security Print function Print data transfer to MFP IPP Port Standard TCP/IP Port Print data transfer to MFP Cover page list acquisition FAX location acquisition / designation Print data transfer to MFP Standard TCP/IP Port Port name Protocol Original UDP/IP Standard port Application number role 61000 Receive 80/443 80/443 80 80 80/443 80 80 515 80 9100 515 9100 515 80 80 515 80/443 Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send Send

HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP HTTP TCP/IP HTTP TCP/IP HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP HTTP HTTP LPR IPP Raw LPR Raw LPR HTTP HTTP LPR TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP TCP/IP

CoverPage Editor Scan to Print Monitor TWAIN driver (Network)

Installer GDI print driver PCL print driver PS print driver XPS print driver FAX driver

PDF Direct Print XPS Direct Print Used in common User list acquisition / User by print driver, Fax authentication driver, and installer Used in common Server (MFP) search by InfoMonitor, CoverPage Editor, Scan to Print Monitor, TWAIN driver and installer

HTTP/HTTPS TCP/IP

Original

UDP/IP

61000

Send/ Receive

2-23

3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description. When you press * , you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there is no problem. Service Program Explanation Operation Page Machine Parameters Used to set or clear machine parameters. <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0> 3-3 Memory Switch Used to set or clear memory switches <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1> 3-23 User data clear This mode clears user programmed informa- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2> 3-81 tion. All RAM clear This mode clears all backup data to initialize <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3> 3-81 the machine. Unique Switches These switches are used to program internal <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <4> 3-53 machine parameters. T30 Monitor The communications on the journal list are <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5> 3-82 able to print. Printer maintenance Shows the error code for "Checkout error" <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6> 3-85 mode errors. Service Report Print- You can print out a report that contains ma- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <7> 3-88 ing chines usage and error history. Monitor speaker If you need to monitor the signal of fax com- <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8> 3-93 munication, turn this mode on. Test Modes This mode offers the ability to print a test <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> 3-93 pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included are followings. 1. Life monitor 2. Printer test 3. Stamp test 4. Feeder test 5. Set background level 6. Make Color Gamma 7. Select Color Gamma Print parameter This function instructs the unit to print a list <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0> 3-98 settings of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique switch settings. Factory functions Allows to perform a series of diagnostic <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1> 3-99 tests: 1. LED test 2. LCD test 3. Panel test 4. SRAM check 5. DRAM check 6. RTC test 7. Page memory check 8. Pseudo ring test 9. Serial number writing Line tests This mode offers several internal tests and <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2> 3-103 ability to monitor certain unit output functions. 1. Relay test 2. Tonal signal test 3. DTMF output test Mirror carriage trans- This mode moves the mirror carriage to the <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> 3-106 fer mode transport position. Consumable order Used to set or clear the consumable order <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5> 3-107 sheet. sheet 3-1

Service Program DRAM clear Life monitor maintenance Sensor input test

Explanation Operation This clears the image storage memory. <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6> Use this mode to clear the resettable counter <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0> or reenter the life monitor. This mode enables to confirm the sensor <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> status. Printer diagnostic This mode enables to confirm the operation <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3> mode of the printer parts. Network service mode Used to clear administrator's password and <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4> initialize authentication method. Flash ROM Sum This mode enables to check Sum after the <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9> check Flash ROM version is updated. Set service report Used to enter location where to send the ser- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <2> vice report. Printer registration This mode adjusts the print position. <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> adjustment Reset printer trouble This mode clears the service call. Clear the <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5> warning when the trouble is settled. Cleaning mode This mode rotate the Pickup roller and reg- <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6> istration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface of them. Key Counter This function is for "Foreign Device Interface" <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0> option). If you have attached the key counter to the machine activate this mode to let it count the printed-paper. Network switch mode Adjust the network parameter. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1> Touch Panel Adjust- Correct the X, Y on the touch panel. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6> ment Printer control param- Adjust functions of print controller. <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7> eter mode Network Capture You can capture the packet data the ma<Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8> chine has sent and received, and download it from the web browser or sent it to an e-mail address. Storage Maintenance This mode is used to erase or initialize the <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9> Compact Flash (CF) memory card on OfficeBridge. Coverage Rate You can set the toner coverage rate of pa- <Setting>, <*>, <6>, <0> per. This will be the base to calculate the toner consumption of the users. Service function menu All the field service program modes are avail- <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7> able from the menu. Wire cleaning warning This mode makes to display the cleaning <Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6> warning for drum charge wire and print head in a certain interval. Installing language You can install, edit or delete languages <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1> on the machine that is prepared in an USB memory. Counter Information This mode is used to correct the counter <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3> Maintenance data on SRAM (main control panel) and CF memory card. Asset Number This mode is used to input the asset number. <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <5> Update the software Update main ROM, optional print controller <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8> ROM and network board ROM using this mode. Quick initial settings You can do the following setting with continu- <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9> ously: 1. Initial settings 2. Consumable order sheet

Page 3-113 3-113 3-115 3-116 3-117 3-118 3-118 3-120 3-121 3-121

3-122

3-122 3-126 3-126 3-129

3-133

3-134

3-134 3-134

3-135

3-136

3-136 3-137

3-137

3-2

3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment

3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>. 2. Press [Edit Parameters].

3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ], or by pressing the numeric keypad.

4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.

5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen. Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen. You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List. The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing [List Parameter].

3-3

3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <0>. 2. Press [Clear Parameters]. 3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.

Adjustable items :
Adujstment Image data output level (Data attenuation) FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal direction) FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal direction) FBS Elastic rate adjustment (Vertical direction) FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) Mirror carriage standby position adjustment Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment Set lamp type of DADF Stamp time Background level adjustment position DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal) : Back DADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal) : Back DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical) : Back DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical) : Back DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Horizontal) : Front DADF Elastic rate adjustment (Horizontal) : Front DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical) : Front DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical) : Front Additional steps for fax scanning DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction): Back FBS Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction) DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction): Back DADF Scanning start position adjustment (Vertical direction): Front DADF Scanning end position adjustment (Vertical direction): Front Offset of Gamma Parameter (Frontside, Text/Text&Photo/Photo) Offset of Gamma Parameter (Backside, Text/Text&Photo/Photo) Offset of Gamma Parameter (Frontside, additional steps for Text) Offset of Gamma Parameter (Backside, additional steps for Text) Protect duplex printing for cassette 1 / cassette 2/ bypass tray / duplex unit Paper loop volume adjustment Current adjustment (Half-letter size plain paper) Current adjustment (Envelop) Current adjustment (Postcard) Current adjustment (Letter and Legal plain paper - front side) Current adjustment (OHP) Current adjustment (Letter and Legal plain paper - back side) Parameter 001 015 016 017 018 020 021 022 024 025 030 031 033 034 035 036 038 039 044 045 047 048 049 050 052 053 055 092 260 280 281 282 285 288 289

3-4

Machine Parameter 000 Factory use only Machine Parameter 001

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage / Comments Adjust the attenuation level for image data signal output. bit 3 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 : Image data output level (Data attenuation) 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1

Memory switch 11 is active Do not set -8.0 dB -9.0 dB -10.0 dB -11.0 dB -12.0 dB -13.0 dB -14.0 dB -15.0 dB

Machine Parameter 002 ~ 014 Factory use only

3-5

Machine Parameter 015

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 Adjust FBS scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2117 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 25 steps 00011001 : 00010100 : 00001010 : 00000101 : 00000000 : 10000101 : 10001010 : 10010100 : -25 steps 10011001 +5.29 mm +4.23 mm +2.12 mm +1.06 mm 0 mm -1.06 mm -2.12 mm -4.23 mm -5.29 mm

Machine Parameter 016

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.01% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings bit 76543210 01111111 : 00010000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10010000 : 11111111 +1.27% +0.16% +0.04% 0% -0.04% -0.16% -1.27%

3-6

Machine Parameter 017

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for FBS. (Vertical) The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.01% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings bit 76543210 01111111 : 00010000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10010000 : 11111111 +1.27% +0.16% +0.04% 0% -0.04% -0.16% -1.27%

Machine Parameter 018

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment For FBS Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter 045 to this adjustment.

Machine Parameter 019 Factory use only

3-7

Machine Parameter 020

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Mirror carriage standby position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the standby position. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm After the adjustment, please adjust machine parameter 013 and 014.

Machine Parameter 021

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Mirror carriage transfer mode position adjustment Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the transfer mode position. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10000010 -0.17 mm : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

3-8

Machine Parameter 022

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Set lamp type of DADF 0: amp with 32 LED L (8 monitoring points) 1: amp with 36 LED L (9 monitoring points) Usage/Comments When you set this switch, set the background level. (See page 3-97.)

6 5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Machine Parameter 023 --- Factory use only Machine Parameter 024
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Confirmation stamp time 1 step = 10 msec bit 76543210 11111111 : 11001000 : 10010110 : 01100100 : 00110010 : 00000001 00000000 2550 msec 2000 msec 1500 msec 1000 msec 500 msec 10 msec 300 msec (default) Usage/Comments This set the time to how long the stamp solenoid is on.

3-9

Machine Parameter 025

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Background level adjustment starting position Adjusts the number of the steps from the home sensor of the mirror carriage OFF to the background level adjusting start position. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 default position (15.35mm) : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm

Machine Parameter 026 ~ 029 Factory use only

3-10

Machine Parameter 030

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Back side of document DADF scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2117 mm) -25 steps bit 25 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00011001 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10011001 +5.29 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm 0 mm -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm

Machine Parameter 031

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Back side of document bit Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.01% 76543210 01111111 : 00010000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10010000 : 11111111 +1.27% +0.16% +0.04% 0% -0.04% -0.16% -1.27% Usage/Comments

Machine Parameter 032 Factory use only

3-11

Machine Parameter 033

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Back side of document Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : 100111111 -5.34 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter 044 to this adjustment.

Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm)

Machine Parameter 034

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Adjust Back side of document Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00010011 +0.93 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter 047 to this adjustment.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm)

3-12

Machine Parameter 035

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Front side of document DADF scanner registration adjustment (Horizontal) Adjusts the start point to scan the document. The plus setting increases the left margin and the minus setting decreases it. 1 step = 5 / 600 dpi (0.2117 mm) -25 steps bit 25 steps Usage/Comments 76543210 00011001 : 00010000 : 00001000 : 00000000 : 10001000 : 10010000 : 10011001 +5.29 mm +3.39 mm +1.69 mm 0 mm -1.69 mm -3.39 mm -5.29 mm

Machine Parameter 036

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Front side of document bit Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF. (Horizontal) The plus setting stretches the image data and the minus setting squeezes it. Each setting changes by 0.01% 76543210 01111111 : 00010000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10010000 : 11111111 +1.27% +0.16% +0.04% 0% -0.04% -0.16% -1.27% Usage/Comments

3-13

Machine Parameter 037

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of the scanning stretching and squeezing for DADF. (Vertical) The plus setting squeezes the image data and the minus setting stretches it. Each setting changes by 0.01% Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings bit 76543210 01111111 : 00010000 : 00000100 : 00000000 : 10000100 : 10010000 : 11111111 +1.27% +0.16% +0.04% 0% -0.04% -0.16% -1.27%

Machine Parameter 038

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Front side of document Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : 100111111 -5.34 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter 048 to this adjustment.

Leading edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm)

3-14

Machine Parameter 039

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 Adjust Front side of document Trailing edge document margin adjustment (ADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00010011 +0.93 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm For fax mode, add the value of machine parameter 049 to this adjustment.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm)

Machine Parameter 040 ~ 043 Factory use only

Machine Parameter 044

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Back side of document Leading edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : 100111111 -5.34 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm Add this value to machine parameter 033. This adjustment is for fax mode only.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Additional steps for FAX mode

3-15

Machine Parameter 045

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Leading edge document margin adjustment For FBS Adjusts the leading edge margin after Home Sensor OFF to the start of scanning the position. 1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Additional steps for FAX mode Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 0 mm : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm Add this value to machine parameter 018. This adjustment is for fax mode only.

Machine Parameter 046 Factory use only

Machine Parameter 047

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 Adjust Back side of document Trailing edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00010011 +0.93 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm Add this value to machine parameter 034. This adjustment is for fax mode only.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Additional steps for FAX mode

3-16

Machine Parameter 048

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Front side of document Leading edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts the leading edge margin from Document Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start of scanning the position. Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : 100111111 -5.34 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm Add this value to machine parameter 038. This adjustment is for fax mode only.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Additional steps for FAX mode

Machine Parameter 049

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 Adjust Front side of document Trailing edge document margin adjustment (DADF) Adjusts document feed after the trailing edge of a document passes Document Sensor 2 (DS2). Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 01111111 +10.76 mm : 00100000 +2.71 mm : 00010000 +1.36 mm : 00010011 +0.93 mm : 00001000 +0.68mm : 00000000 : 10001000 -0.68 mm : 10010000 -1.36 mm : 10100000 -2.71 mm : -127steps 11111111 -10.76 mm Add this value to machine parameter 039. This adjustment is for fax mode only.

1 step = 2 / 600 dpi (0.0847 mm) Additional steps for FAX mode

3-17

Machine Parameter 050

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Offset of Gamma Parameter Copy mode ADF-frontside Document type: Text/Text&Photo/Photo Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 11111111 Darkest setting : 126 steps 11111110 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 step 00000001 : 0 step 00000000 Standard : -1 step 00000001 : -2 steps 000000010 : -126 steps 011111110 : -127steps 01111111 Lightest setting

Machine Parameter 051 Factory use only Machine Parameter 052 Factory use only
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Offset of Gamma Parameter Copy mode ADF-backside Document type: Text/Text&Photo/Photo Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 11111111 Darkest setting : 126 steps 11111110 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 step 00000001 : 0 step 00000000 Standard : -1 step 00000001 : -2 steps 000000010 : -126 steps 011111110 : -127steps 01111111 Lightest setting

3-18

Machine Parameter 053

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Offset of Gamma Parameter Copy mode ADF-frontside Document type: Text Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 11111111 Darkest setting : 126 steps 11111110 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 step 00000001 : 0 step 00000000 Standard : -1 step 00000001 : -2 steps 000000010 : -126 steps 011111110 : -127steps 01111111 Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 050 (common steps for copy steps) and 053. However the steps cannot exceed -127 or 127.

Machine Parameter 054 Factory use only Machine Parameter 055

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Offset of Gamma Parameter Copy mode ADF-backtside Document type: Text Usage/Comments Switch 76543210 Settings 127 steps 11111111 Darkest setting : 126 steps 11111110 : 2 steps 00000010 : 1 step 00000001 : 0 step 00000000 Standard : -1 step 00000001 : -2 steps 000000010 : -126 steps 011111110 : -127steps 01111111 Lightest setting The total step is the sum of Machine parameter 052 (common steps for copy steps) and 055. However the steps cannot exceed -127 or 127.

Machine Parameter 056 ~ 091 Factory use only

3-19

Machine Parameter 092

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Able to use the bypass tray for duplex printing 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Able to use the second cassette for duplex printing 0: Yes 1: No Able to use the first cassette for duplex printing 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments When set to 1, the cassette or the bypass tray is not available for duplex printing.

6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0

Machine Parameter 093 ~ 259 Factory use only

3-20

Machine Parameter 260

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Adjust Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Paper loop volume 0 Usage/Comments Adjust the loop at the synchronizing roller. More loop will correct paper skew, but thin paper may jam easily. Adjust it one step at a time. bit 43210 01111 00100 00011 00010 00001 00000

+5.0 mm +4.2 mm +3.4 mm +1.7 mm + 0.8 mm No adjustment (default)

Switch bit 7 to 1 to reduce (minus) the volume.

Machine Parameter 261 ~ 279 Factory use only

3-21

Machine Parameter 280

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Half-letter size Plain paper Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this paramur, r, eter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps 8 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31.

Machine Parameter 281

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Envelops Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31. 3-22

Machine Parameter 282

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Postcards Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31.

Machine Parameter 283 ~ 284 Factory use only Machine Parameter 285
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Letter and Legal size Plain paper front side Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this paramur, r, eter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps 8 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31.

3-23

Machine Parameter 286 ~ 287 Factory use only Machine Parameter 288
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Transparency sheets (OHP) Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this parameter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 8 steps 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31.

Machine Parameter 289

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Current adjustment Letter and Legal size Plain paper back side Usage/Comments When transfer problems occur, adjust this paramur, r, eter. Switch 76543210 Settings 31 steps 8 steps The plus setting increases the current and the minus setting decreases it. Each setting changes by 0.11 mA. 00011111 : 00001000 : 00000000 10000001 10000010 : 10001000 : 10011111 +3.41 mA +0.88 mA 0 mA Initial setting -0.11 mA -0.22 mA -0.88 mA -3.41 mA

-1 steps -2 steps -8 steps -31 steps

When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example, 10000001 means -0.11 mA.

NOTE
djusting them too many steps affect the print A quality. Just try to decrease one or two steps at first. O NOT adjust the steps larger than 31 or D smaller than -31. 3-24

3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power are lost. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>. 2. Press [Mem Switch Edit].

3. Call up the desired switch by pressing

or

, or by pressing the numeric keypad.

4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.

5. To navigate through the memory switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ] to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory switch edit screen. Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch. 6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen. You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List. The memory switch List will be printed by pressing [Mem Switch Print].

3-25

3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <1>. 2. Press [Mem Switch Clear]. 3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.

Adjustable items :
000 CED detection condition DIS detect time after dialing CED detection Phone line type for the first phone line DIS detection condition PBX mode dial pause Redial in D.0.7 error D TMF attenuation Ring signal detect time Number of CI signal detection in Fax / Tel Ready mode Dual ring detection Long ring detection Frequency of the CI signal Busy tone detection Fallback pattern Overseas mode V. 29 Echo Protect tone Maximum transmit speed Time between reception of CFR and transmission of data Interval between DCS and TCF Output attenuation TTI clock type TTI calendor type TTI transmit ECM response time ECM error retransmit time Interval between DIS and DCS ANSam detection V. 34 transmission CSI / TSI / CIG transmit ECM mode Retransmit automatically when receiving RTN / PIN signals Program individual autodialer attributes Sending RTC signal when transmission is canceled Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs Action after EOR signal Additional data on TTI transmit Subscriber ID transmit TTI (name) transmit Time between ANSam output and CM output Check only manually entered fax numbers in ID check transmission Data error rate Pause one second after sending CED Time between ANSam output and DIS output Receive speed DIS "inch" declaration T1 timer Print image data when post message is not received after receiving RTC signal DIS / DTC Extend field Transmit G3 echo receive

001 002 004 005

010

011

012

013

015

016

017 020

021

3-26

023

030

031

032

033 040 051

V .34 reception Action at time-out in Fax / tel ready mode Calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode Number of HDLC end flags Digital cable equalizer Tone detection level EYE-Q check level at 7200 bps EYE-Q check level at 9600 bps EYE-Q check level at 12000 bps EYE-Q check level at 14400 bps EYE-Q slice level Check EYE-Q EYE-Q check level at 2400 bps EYE-Q check level at 4800 bps Delete receive echo of CFR at the receiver side Expand FSK receive time after detecting flag Document length limitation

Error line replacement 052 Add remote fax mark to the journal report Name printing priority on journal report 060 CML relay off time after dialing DTMF tones heard through handset 061 Off-hook / on-hook detect time 062 064 065 070 CNG detect in Ans / Fax read Switch-hook time CNG detect period after TAD begins recording ICM CNG detect period after TAD answers Adjustment of CI detect time Beep if fax handset is hanged up Display error line Tonal line monitor Print check message if power is lost Print page if error occurs during memory transmission Print check message Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is NG Print TCR with the original page during memory transmission when the result is OK Print T.30 monitor at communication error Print T.30 monitor Display modem speed Erase polled document Timing to turn off the S-Relay at fax reception Display when there is no TTI Day light saving time (Summer time) start month Day light saving time (Summer time) start week Day light saving time (Summer time) end month Day light saving time (Summer time) end week

071

072 076 097 098

3-27

Memory switch 00x : Dialer

Memory switch 000 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 CED detection condition 0 Usage / Comments Sets whether the detection should be strict not. Normal Strict 350 ms 500 ms 700 ms 1000 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Switch 5 4 3 0 DIS detect time after dialing 0 : 55 sec 1 : 70 sec CED detection 0 : No 1 : Yes Factory use only Phone line type for the first phone line 0 : PSTN 1 : PBX

Sets the DIS signal is detected after dialing a number.

Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED signal. When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial tone and acts according to the setting of memory switch 000, bit "1" . When set to PBX, the machine always dials a given number of seconds after going off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of seconds.

1 0

0 0

3-28

Memory switch 00x : Dialer

Memory switch 001 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 DIS detection condition 0 Usage / Comments Sets whether the detection should be strict or not. Normal Strict 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 PBX mode dial pause

Sets the number of seconds the machine waits before dialing when memory switch 000, bit 0 is set to PBX mode. Switch 3210 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Pause time 0 sec 1 sec 2 sec 3 sec 4 sec Initial setting 5 sec 6 sec 7 sec 8 sec 9 sec 10 sec 11 sec 12 sec 13 sec 14 sec 15 sec

Memory switch 002 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Redial in D.0.7 error 0 : Yes 1 : No Usage / Comments When set to 1 , the machine does not redial in D.0.7 error (Incoming detection time over).

Memory switch 003 : Factory use only

3-29

Memory switch 00x : Dialer

Memory switch 004 :
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only DTMF attenuation Usage / Comments See table below. The setting of this switch is available only when setting other than 0.

Memory Switch 004 : DTMF attenuation

Switch 3 2 1 0

-15 dB 1 1 1 1

-14 dB 1 1 1 0

-13 dB 1 1 0 1

-12 dB 1 1 0 0

-11 dB 1 0 1 1

-10 dB 1 0 1 0

-9 dB 1 0 0 1

-8 dB 1 0 0 0

-7 dB 0 1 1 1

-6 dB 0 1 1 0

-5 dB 0 1 0 1

-4 dB 0 1 0 0

-3 dB 0 0 1 1

-2 dB 0 0 1 0

-1 dB 0 0 0 1

-0 dB 0 0 0 0

3-30

Memory switch 00x : Dialer

Memory switch 005 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 1 Ring signal detect time 1 0 Usage / Comments Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected after hanging up. (Fax / Tel Ready mode only.) Switch 654 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 3 0 Number of CI signal detection in Fax / Tel Ready mode 0 : Detect 1 time 1 : Detect 2 times Dual ring detection Long ring detection 0 : No 1 : Yes Frequency of the CI signal 0 : No 1 : Yes

100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms

Select the number of detection time of CI signal in the Fax / Tel Ready mode or in the ringer silent mode. Incoming calls are answered according to this setting regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User Settings. When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer an incoming ring with an off time of 120-60 ms. Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring if the ring on time is longer than two seconds. When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of the incoming CI signal.

2 1

0 0

Memory switch 006~ 009 : Factory use only

3-31

Memory switch 01x : Transmission

Memory switch 010 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting Set this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit is mistaken 1 Busy tone detection for a busy signal. 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 14400 Set at 0 : 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1 : 4 times 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time 1 time 0 Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by the CED 0 : No signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS signal and 1 : Yes transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. 0 V. 29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo suppression 0 : No will cut the beginning portion of the transmitted information 1 : Yes which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high-speed modem training (V. 29). 1 Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 1 0 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

3 2 1 0

Memory switch 011 :

bit 7 6 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data 0 1 When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms Switch 5 0 0 1 1 Switch 4 0 1 0 1 Output attenuation See table below

5 4

0 0

3 2 1 0

1 0 0 0

Memory Switch 011 : Output attenuation

Switch 3 2 1 0

-15 dB 1 1 1 1

-14 dB 1 1 1 0

-13 dB 1 1 0 1

-12 dB 1 1 0 0

-11 dB 1 0 1 1

-10 dB 1 0 1 0

-9 dB 1 0 0 1

-8 dB 1 0 0 0
3-32

-7 dB 0 1 1 1

-6 dB 0 1 1 0

-5 dB 0 1 0 1

-4 dB 0 1 0 0

-3 dB 0 0 1 1

-2 dB 0 0 1 0

-1 dB 0 0 0 1

-0 dB 0 0 0 0

Memory switch 01x : Transmission

Memory switch 012 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Setting 0 TTI clock type 0 : AM PM clock 1 : 24 hour clock 1 TTI calendor type 0 Usage / Comments

6 5

bit

65 11 10 01

dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy (default) yyyy/mm/dd

TTI transmit 0 : No 1 : Yes

NOTE

1 0

0 0

Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) ECM response time The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM post 0 : 3 sec message. 1 : 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted. 0 : 200 ms 1 : 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms Switch 1 0 0 1 1 Switch 0 0 1 0 1

When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016.

Memory switch 013 :

bit 7 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the 0 : Yes handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. 1 : No Individual setting for V.34 transmission. 0 V. 34 transmission 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 CSI / TSI / CIG transmit When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and CIG signals 0 : Yes are disabled. 1 : No 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces document mem0 : On ory and may lengthen transmission and reception times. 1 : Off 0 Retransmit automatically When set to 1, retransmission disables automatically if rewhen receiving RTN / PIN ceiving RTN / PIN signals. signals 0 : Yes 1 : No 1 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only

2 1 0

Memory switch 014 : Factory use only

3-33

Memory switch 01x : Transmission

Memory switch 015 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Setting Program individual autodi0 aler attributes 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 0 0 0 0 Usage / Comments

6 5 4 3 2

Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and 013 as attribute 4 when fax destination are programmed. (Refer to page 3-49 for settings.) Reset the value to 0, when you have finished entering the attributes. Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Sending RTC signal when RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission. transmission is canceled When set at 0, the machine will send the RTC if the transmis0 : Yes sion is canceled. No error will occur. 1 : No When set at 1, an error will occur because RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled transmission. Cancel redial if T.4.1 or When set at 0, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the machine T.4.4 error occurs will not retry the transmission. 0 : Yes 1 : No Action after EOR signal Sets action after receiving PPR four times (default: this num0 : Continue ber of times is set on unique switch 010 bit 0-1)at 2400 bps. 1 : Discontinue

Memory switch 016 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Usage / Comments

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only A d d i t i o n a l d a t a o n T T I When set at 0, the transmission of the additional data (time, transmit the number of pages, file number, etc) is disabled. 0 : No 1 : Yes

NOTE

Subscriber ID transmit 0 : No 1 : Yes

This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the subscriber ID is disabled.

NOTE
This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available. When set at 0, the transmission of the name which was stored in the unit is disabled.

TTI (name) transmit 0 : No 1 : Yes

NOTE
This switch is available only when Memory switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is available.

Factory use only

3-34

Memory switch 01x : Transmission

Memory switch 017 :
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Usage / Comments

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Time between ANSam out- When using optical communication line, wait to make sure that put and CM output the terminal adopter has turned the echo-canceler off. Waiting too long may fail the receiver to catch the CM and go to V 17 procedures. This setting is needed only for optical communication line. bit 321 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000

1750 msec 1500 msec 1250 msec 1000 msec 750 msec 500 msec 250 msec Refers the time set on the modem

Check only manually en- When set at 1 , the ID check transmission will check only the tered fax numbers in ID manually entered fax numbers and not check the number encheck transmission tered using the address book. 0 : No 1 : Yes

Memory switch 018 ~ 019 : Factory use only

3-35

Memory switch 02x : Reception

Memory switch 020 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting Determines the allowable number of erred lines out of total 0 Data error rate lines received in a document. 0 : 10% 1 : 20% 0 Pause one second after A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression in some sending CED telephone equipment. When set to "1", the machine pauses 0 : No (75 ms) one second after sending CED, which allows echo suppres1 : Yes (1 sec) sion to restart. This may help with problematic overseas reception. 1 Time between ANSam out- This setting is for optical communication line. put and DIS output Adjust the time between ANSam output completion and DIS 0 : 75msec. output start. (When V.8 procedure dose not start by output 1 : 450msec. ANSam, it moves to V.8 procedure by output DIS) Terminal adopter turns the echo-canceler off and then on within 400 ms during the silent time. Use this adjustment to make sure that the echo-canceler is turned on again, when the communication procedure has moved from V.34 to T.30. 0 Factory use only 1 Receive speed (kbps) 1 Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines. 0 1 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

4 3 2 1 0

3-36

Memory switch 02x : Reception

Memory switch 021 :
bit 7 6 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 Factory use only DIS "inch" declaration 0 0 : No 1 : Yes 1 Factory use only 0 T1 timer Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials the remote 0 : 35 sec machines phone number, it begins sending CNG and waits 1 : 20 sec this amount of time before disconnecting the line. 1 Print image data when post If the received document includes the RTC, the machine prints message is not received the data even though the following protocol is not succeeded. after receiving RTC signal 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 DIS / DTC Extend field Setting this switch to "1" will disable ITU-T superfine mode. Transmit 0 : Yes 1 : No (Tx until Bit No.24 of DIS / DTC) 0 G3 echo receive 1 Adjusts the delay between detection of training / TCF and sending of CFR. Switch 1 Switch 0 100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

5 4

1 0

Memory switch 022 : Factory use only Memory switch 023 :

bit 7 6 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 0 V .34 reception 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 1 Action at time-out in Fax / tel ready mode 0 : Hang up 1 : Receive fax 0 Calling period in Fax / Tel 0 reception mode 0 Usage / Comments Individual setting for V.34 reception.

5 4 3

Set this switch to 1, to receive fax when time-over occurs in Fax / tel ready mode.

2 1 0

Defines the calling period in Fax / Tel reception mode. bit 210 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

30 seconds 40 seconds 50 seconds 60 seconds 90 seconds 120 seconds 180 seconds 300 seconds

Initial setting

Memory switch 024~029 : Factory use only

3-37

Memory switch 03x : Modem

Memory switch 030 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 Number of HDLC end flags Defines the number of HDLC end flags. 0 1 Switch 7654 0 0000 1 0001 2 0010 3 Initial setting 0011 4 0100 5 0101 6 0110 7 0111 8 1000 9 1001 10 1010 11 1011 12 1100 13 1101 14 1110 15 1111 16 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only Digital cable equalizer When set to 1, become efficient for the line short break, 0 0 : Free but become weak for the line noise. Its available only for 1 : Hold communication at 14,400 or 12,000 bit/s. 0 Tone detection level When set to 1, detection level goes up but it becomes noise0 : -43 dBm sensitive. 1 : -48 dBm Adjust CED (2100 Hz) detection level in Unique switch 035.

3 2 1

Memory switch 031 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Adjust Setting EYE-Q check level at 1 0 7200 bps 1 0 1 0 1 0 EYE-Q check level at 9600 bps EYE-Q check level at 12000 bps EYE-Q check level at 14400 bps Usage / Comments 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

3-38

Memory switch 03x : Modem

Memory switch 032 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Setting EYE-Q slice level 0 0 : Disable 1 : Enable 1 Check EYE-Q 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 0 1 0 1 0 Factory use only Factory use only EYE-Q check level at 2400 bps EYE-Q check level at 4800 bps Usage / Comments Setting this bit to 1 enables memory switch 032, bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and enables EYE-Q check adjustment. Set at 0 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not checked after checking TCF. Set at 1 : Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked after checking TCF. 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient 0 1 0 1

5 4 3 2 1 0

Memory switch 033 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Usage / Comments

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Delete receive echo of CFR Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode. at the receiver side Sets this switch to 1 to resolve the problem caused of the 0 : No echo of CFR. 1 : Yes Expand FSK receive time Setting this switch to 1 extend HDLC frame receive timer after detecting flag in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after detecting pre0 : 3.3 seconds amble. 1 : 10 seconds

Memory switch 034~ 039 : Factory use only

3-39

Memory switch 04x : Scanner

Memory switch 040 :
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Document length limit Usage / Comments Setting to unlimited will override document jam sensing. See the table below. (mm) 500 500 900 1,500 1,500 1,500 500 500 500 900 900 900

Memory Switch 40 -0 0

Mode COPY FAX SCAN

Ultra-fine Hyper-fine Super-fine Fine Normal Ultra-fine Hyper-fine Super-fine Fine Normal

COPY FAX SCAN

Memory switch 041 ~ 049 : Factory use only

3-40

Memory switch 05x : Printer

Memory switch 050 : Factory use only Memory switch 051 :
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage / Comments

When an error line is caused, the line will be replaced to the Error line replacement 0 : Replace to the former designated line.

line 1 : Replace to a white line

Memory switch 052

bit 7 6 5 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Add remote fax mark to the journal report 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 Name printing priority on 0 journal report 0 0 0 43210 00000 00001 00100 00111 01010 10011 10101 First priority Address Book Entry Subscriber ID Address Book Entry Address Book Number Address Book Number Subscriber ID Subscriber ID Usage / Comments Set this function to 1 to print an R on the journal report when the location name is acquired from the remote fax machine. Select name printing priority. Refer table below.

4 3 2 1 0 Bit

Second priority Address Book Number Address Book Number Subscriber ID Address Book Entry Subscriber ID Address Book Entry Address Book Number

Third priority Subscriber ID Address Book Number Subscriber ID Address Book Entry Address Book Number Address Book Entry

Memory switch 053 ~ 059 : Factory use only

3-41

Memory switch 06x : Remote reception

Memory switch 060 :
bit 7 6 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Factory use only 1 CML relay off time after dialing 0 : 1 sec 1 : 200 ms 0 DTMF tones heard through handset 0 : No 1 : Yes 1 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only Usage / Comments When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise may occur as the CML relay switches on and off. Set this switch to 0 to avoid this. Determines if DTMF tones are produced through the handset in off-hook dialing.

4 3 2 1 0

Memory switch 061 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Off-hook / on-hook detect time Usage / Comments Sets the time interval between the on-hook and off-hook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition. Switch 3210 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms 0100 400 ms Initial setting 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms 1001 900 ms 1010 1000 ms 1011 1100 ms 1100 1200 ms 1101 1300 ms 1110 1400 ms 1111 1500 ms

3-42

Memory switch 06x : Remote reception

Memory switch 062 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Usage / Comments

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only CNG detect in Ans / Fax When set to 1, the machine detects the CNG signal in Ans / ready Fax ready. 0 : No 1 : Yes Switch-hook time If the switch hook is quickly depressed and released, switchto-fax will occur. This setting adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must be. Switch 3210 0000 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000 1001 1010 1011 1100 1101 1110 1111 Time 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms 400 ms 500 ms 600 ms 700 ms 800 ms 900 ms 1000 ms 1100 ms 1200 ms 1300 ms 1400 ms 1500 ms

3 2 1 0

0 0 1 1

Initial setting

Memory switch 063 : Factory use only

3-43

Memory switch 06x : Remote reception

Memory switch 064 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD 0 TAD begins recording ICM begins recording incoming message. 1 1 Switch 7654 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec Initial setting 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1010 100 sec 1011 110 sec 1100 120 sec 1101 130 sec 1110 140 sec 1111 150 sec 0 CNG detect period after Sets the period during which CNG is detected after the TAD 0 TAD answers answers an incoming call. 0 1 Switch 3210 Time 0000 0 sec 0001 10 sec Initial setting 0010 20 sec 0011 30 sec 0100 40 sec 0101 50 sec 0110 60 sec 0111 70 sec 1000 80 sec 1001 90 sec 1010 100 sec 1011 110 sec 1100 120 sec 1101 130 sec 1110 140 sec 1111 150 sec
Incoming rings TAD plays Outgoing message CNG detection is active
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3)

3 2 1 0

TAD records Incoming message CNG detection is active

(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)

3-44

Memory switch 06x : Remote reception

Memory switch 065 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Adjustment of CI detect time Usage / Comments Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI detect time. Switch 76543 11111 11101 : 01001 00111 00101 00011 00000 00010 00100 00110 01000 : 11100 11110 Factory use only Factory use only Beep if fax handset is hanged up 0 : Yes 1 : No Time 150 msec 140 msec : 40 msec 30 msec 20 msec 10 msec 0 msec -10 msec -20 msec -30 msec -40 msec : -140 msec -150 msec Determines if your machine beeps when having left the faxs handset hanging up after communication.

Initial setting

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0

Memory switch 066~ 069 : Factory use only

3-45

Memory switch 07x : Operation

Memory switch 070 :
bit 7 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Display error line 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 0 Tonal line monitor Usage / Comments The number of error lines contained in the received data will be shown in the LCD. Allows fax communication to be heard through the monitor speaker. bit 65 10 01 00

6 5

4 3

0 1

Factory use only Print check message if power is lost 0 : No 1 : Yes

ON Monitor until DIS outputs OFF

If the machine could not hold the memory in an event of power losses, documents will be lost. When power is restored, a check message will print.

Print page if error occurs For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for during memory transmis- memory transmission will print along a check message if an error occurs during memory transmission. sion 0 : No 1 : Yes Print check message 0 : No 1 : Yes Factory use only To notify the user of an error, a check message can be printed if a communication error occurs.

3-46

Memory switch 07x : Operation

Memory switch 071 :
bit 7 6 5 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for 1 page during memory trans- memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission when the result is mission result is NG. NG 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 Factory use only 1 Print TCR with the original For easy identification, the first page of a document stored for page during memory trans- memory transmission will print along a TCR when the transmission when the result is mission result is OK. OK 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 Print T.30 monitor at com- Set this switch to 1 to print out T.30 monitor automatically at munication error communication error. 0 : No 1 : Yes Set this switch to 1 to print out T.30 monitor by each commu0 Print T.30 monitor nication. 0 Display modem speed The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD. 0 : No 1 : Yes

4 3

1 0

Memory switch 071 Print TCR with the original page

Switch 3 Switch 5 When Memory transmission was OK, When Memory transmission was NG, When all broadcast transmissions were OK, When some broadcast transmissions were NG,

0 0 No No No No 1 No Yes No Yes 0 Yes No Yes No

1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes

Memory switch 072 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Erase polled document 0 : No 1 : Yes Factory use only Usage / Comments Determines if a document stored for polling is erased after being polled.

Memory switch 073 ~ 075 : Factory use only

3-47

Memory switch 07x : Operation

Memory switch 076 :
bit 7 6 5 4 Initial Adjust Usage / Comments Setting 0 Timing to turn off the S- Adjust this setting when a private exchanger disconnects the 0 line when S-Relay is turned off. Relay at fax reception. 0 Bit 7654 time 0 1111 1500 seconds 1110 1400 seconds : : 1010 1000 seconds 1001 900 seconds 0100 800 seconds : : 0100 500 seconds 0100 400 seconds 0011 300 seconds 0010 200 seconds 0001 100 seconds 0000 10 seconds (default) 1 Display when there is no TTI 0 : No 1 : Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

2 1 0

0 1 0

Memory switch 077 ~ 079 : Factory use only Memory switch 08x : Not used

3-48

Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous Memory switch 090 ~ 096 : Factory use only Memory switch 097 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) start month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 March 0001 January 0010 February 0011 March (Initial setting) 0100 April 0101 May 0110 June 0111 July 1000 August 1001 September 1010 October 1 0 1 1 November 1100 December This switch sets on which week when the day light saving time (summer time) begins. Start day light saving from Sunday 1:00 2 1 0 0 1 0 Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0 0 0 0 of the last week 0 0 0 1 of the first week 0 0 1 0 of the second week (initial) 0 0 1 1 of the third week 0 1 0 0 of the fourth week 0 1 0 1 of the last week of the month

Day light saving time (Summer time) start week

3-49

Memory switch 09x : Miscellaneous

Memory switch 098 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 1 0 1 1 Adjust Day light saving time (Summer time) end month Usage/Comments This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends. Switch 7 6 5 4 Time 0000 October 0001 January 0010 February 0011 March 0100 April 0101 May 0110 June 0111 July 1000 August 1001 September 1010 October 1 0 1 1 November (initial) 1100 December This switch sets the week when the day light saving time (summer time) ends. End day light saving from Sunday 1:00 2 1 0 0 0 1 Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0 0 0 0 of the last week 0 0 0 1 of the first week (Initial) 0 0 1 0 of the second week 0 0 1 1 of the third week 0 1 0 0 of the fourth week 0 1 0 1 f the last week o

Day light saving time (Summer time) end week

Memory switch 099 : Factory use only

3-50

3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes

This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in Memory Switches 010, 011, 012, 013 and 014.

To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 15, bit 7 to 1. (See 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more information on changing memory switch 015.) 2. When the function is enabled, an Attribute option is added to the address book destination registration steps. As an address book destination is programmed, an extra step showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, Attribute 4, and Attribute 5 are added as the last step.

3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table. To change a setting, press or until the cursor is below the desired bit position; then press 1 or 0 to make the change.

4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute. 5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3-4. 6. Reset memory switch 15 bit 7 to 0, when you have finished entering the attributes.

3-51

Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Usage/Comments Busy tone detection Sets this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit 0: No is mistaken for a busy signal. 1: Yes Fallback pattern (bps) 2400 4800 7200 9600 14400 Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times Overseas mode Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by 0: No the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS 1: Yes signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to the second DIS signal. V.29 Echo Protect tone International telephone lines equipped with echo 0: No suppression will cut the beginning portion of the 1: Yes transmitted information which may cause the receiver not to receive the training and data. To protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5 second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the training using G3 high-speed modem training (V.29). Maximum transmit speed (kbps) 2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

3 2 1 0

1 1 0 1

3-52

Attribute 2 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 011)

Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Usage/Comments The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR and data transmission using this switch. 6 1 250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms Switch 7 0 0 1 1 Switch 6 0 1 0 1 Interval between DCS and TCF When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch. 4 0 75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms Switch 5 0 0 1 1 Switch 4 0 1 0 1 3 2 1 0 * * * * Output attenuation See table below.

Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch 3 2 1 0 -15 dB 1 1 1 1 -14 dB 1 1 1 0 -13 dB 1 1 0 1 -12 dB 1 1 0 0 -11 dB 1 0 1 1 -10 dB 1 0 1 0 -9 dB 1 0 0 1 -8 dB 1 0 0 0 -7 dB 0 1 1 1 -6 dB 0 1 1 0 -5 dB 0 1 0 1 -4 dB 0 1 0 0 -3 dB 0 0 1 1 -2 dB 0 0 1 0 -1 dB 0 0 0 1 -0 dB 0 0 0 0

3-53

Attribute 3 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 012)

Switch 7 Initial Adjust Setting 0 TTI clock type 0 : AM PM clock 1 : 24 hour clock 1 TTI calendor type 0 Usage/Comments

6 5

bit

65 11 10 01

dd mm yyyy mm dd yyyy (default) yyyy/mm/dd

TTI transmit 0: No 1: Yes

NOTE
3 0

1 0

0 0

Turning TTI transmission off may violate local or federal regulations.) The time limit to receive the response signal for the ECM response time ECM post message. 0: 3 sec 1: 4.8 sec ECM error retransmit time The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted. 0: 200 ms 1: 400 ms Interval between DIS and DCS 0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms Switch 1 0 0 1 1 Switch 0 0 1 0 1

When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled. The TTI includes the followings: Sender name Senders fax number Data & time, and number of pages To set the individually transmission of them, see Memory SW 016.

Attribute 4 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 013)

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Adjust Usage/Comments Setting 0 ANSam detection During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs the 0 : Yes handshake and an error occurs, set to 1. 1 : No Individual setting for V.34 transmission. 0 V. 34 transmission 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 CSI / TSI / CIG transmit When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and 0 : Yes CIG signals are disabled. 1 : No 0 ECM mode Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces docu0 : On ment memory and may lengthen transmission and 1 : Off reception times. 0 Retransmit automatically when When set to 1, retransmission disables automatireceiving RTN / PIN signals cally if receiving RTN / PIN signals. 0 : Yes 1 : No 1 Factory use only 0 Factory use only 0 Factory use only

2 1 0

Attribute 5 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 014)

3-54

3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery maintains these settings if power is lost. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>. 2. Press [Switch Edit].

3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ] or [ ], or by pressing the numeric keypad.

4. Select the desired switch by pressing the box.

5. To navigate through the unique switch settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen. Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen. You can confirm the initial setting of each unique switch by the unique switch list. The unique switch list will be printed by pressing [Switch Print].

3-55

3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <0>, <4>. 2. Press [Switch Clear]. 3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.

4. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready.

Adjustable items :
Time to output simulated ring tone Congestion tone detection Enable the first tone key Enable the second tone key Enable the dial prefix key Display only direct input number on redial list The period before detecting busytone after dialing ncluding TTI inside the document I he number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission T Encoding method V.8 handshake in real time Tx Available * and # upon F-code box registration Available * and # upon F-code communicating Ignore space in F-code ID F-code sub-frame off Retrieve document Ignore F-code bit JBIG transmission Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 7200 bps Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 4800 bps Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission Number of redial times for archive transmission Transmit CED signal Pseudo-ring start time Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory TCF check time (in 100 ms units) Document storage method MMR reception JBIG reception Receive the junk fax Receiving fax in 600 dpi (Super fine) Encoding method Displays the message No Network Connection.

000 001

003 010 013 015 016

017 018

019 020

021 022

023 029

3-56

030

032 035 037 040 043 045

050

051 052 053 067 071 072 075 077 078 079 081 082 085

088 098 099

3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 3000 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 2800 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 2400 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 ANSam output time Reception level at CED 2100 Hz The timing between V.34 handshake signals Show the lamp in error Set the image quality of thumbnail at preview function Confirm the numbers of line on the front page and back page Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document leading edge Enables measures for false detection of punch holes as a document trailing edge Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document leading edge Punch hole maximum size adjustment Smoothing in Hyper Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode Smoothing in Super Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode Smoothing in Fine mode Smoothing in Normal mode Give priority to fit to paper Printing margin adjustment Printer density adjustment CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready Number of detection DTMF Line monitor in Quick memory transmission Rx document to polling document DRAM back up Journal list printing order Key press time to activate sleep mode Print time-out on PCL text printing (at local printing) Print timeout on GDI (at local printing) Print timeout on PCL (at local printing) Print dialing error on journal Copy all data at Copy Machine Settings Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty Receive time stamp position Keep preview function ON when time over has occurred Respond warm-up condition as ready on SNMP Respond Sleep condition as ready on SNMP Enable Quick TWAIN

3-57

Unique Switch 00x : Dialer

Unique Switch 000 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Time to output simulated ring tone Usage/Comments Adjust the time from income to output ring tone. (The time to detect CED) bit 654 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000

4.9 seconds 4.6 seconds 4.3 seconds 4.0 seconds 3.7 seconds 3.4 seconds 3.1 seconds 2.8 seconds

default

3 2

0 1

1 0

0 0

Factory use only Congestion tone detection 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only

Setting this switch to 0 ignores telephone line congestion tones.

Unique Switch 001 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Enable the first tone key 0: No 1: Yes Enable the second tone key 0: No 1: Yes Enable the dial prefix key 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments

Unique Switch 002 Factory use only

3-58

Unique Switch 00x : Dialer

Unique Switch 003 :
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Display only direct input number on redial list 0: Yes 1: No Factory use only Factory use only The period before detecting busytone after dialing Usage/Comments Set this switch to 0 to display all dial history on the redial list. Set this switch to 1 to display only direct input number on the list.

5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 1111 1500 ms 1110 1400 ms : 1000 800 ms 0111 700 ms 0110 600 ms 0101 500 ms 0100 400 ms (Initial setting) 0011 300 ms 0010 200 ms 0001 100 ms 0000 0 ms

Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 Factory use only

3-59

Unique Switch 01x : Transmission

Unique Switch 010 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Including TTI inside the document 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

Setting this bit to 0 transmit the document length added with the TTI. Setting it to 1 transmit the length including TTI inside the document. However in this case, the image at the top of the document might be overlapped with TTI. (TTI length: 4.2mm)

2 1 0

0 1 1

Factory use only The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission 1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1

Unique Switch 011 ~ 012 Factory use only Unique Switch 013 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Encoding method Usage/Comments

Specify the encoding method. bit 10 11 10 01 00

MMR MR MH Machine capability (default)

Unique Switch 014 Factory use only

3-60

Unique Switch 01x : Transmission

Unique Switch 015 Transmission
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only V.8 handshake in real time Tx 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

Determine I the handshaking will be done with V.8 recommendation if real time transmission.

Unique Switch 016 Transmission

Switch 7 Initial Setting 1 Adjust Available * and # upon F-code box registration 0: No 1: Yes Available * and # upon F-code communicating 0: No 1: Yes Ignore space in F-code ID 0: Yes 1: No F-code sub-frame off 0: Send 1: Not send Factory use only Factory use only Retrieve document 0: No 1: Yes Ignore F-code bit 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments Determines if the * (asterisk) and # (sharp) are available upon F-code box registration. Determines if the * (asterisk), and # (sharp) are available upon F-code communicating.

6 5

1 0

Determines if checking the space stored in the F-code ID. Do not send the sub-address and password of F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal after EOM signal.

3 2 1

0 0 0

Retrieve the document received in F-code SecureMail box by polling transmission. Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS signal at F-code polled transmission.

Note
The F-code communication is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code (SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.

3-61

Unique Switch 01x : Transmission

Unique Switch 017 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only JBIG transmission 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments

Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.

Unique Switch 018 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 7200 bps 0: No 1: Yes Disconnect the line when the transmission speed falls down under 4800 bps 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Transmission when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission. 0: Retry to detect NSF 1: Transmit with the standard protocol Usage/Comments

Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 7200 bps.

Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line when the transmission speed fall down under 4800 bps.

2 1 0

0 0 0

Determines the action when disable to detect first NSF in real time transmission.

3-62

Unique Switch 01x : Transmission

Unique Switch 019 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Number of redial times for archive transmission Usage/Comments

Switch 4 3 2 1 0 Settings 0000 0 time 0001 1 time 0010 2 times 0011 3 times 0100 4 times 0101 5 times 0110 6 times 0111 7 times 1000 8 times 1001 9 times 1010 10 times 1011 11 times 1100 12 times 1101 13 times 1110 14 times (default) 1111 15 times

3-63

Unique Switch 02x : Reception

Unique Switch 020 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Transmit CED signal 0: No 1: Yes Pseudo-ring start time (seconds) 4.5 5.4 7.2 9.0 Switch 3: 0 0 1 1 Switch 2: 0 1 0 1 Printout the pages completed to receive during receiving into memory 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments

Determines if sending CED signal.

Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after answering an incoming call. (Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)

2 1

0 1

Determines if whether to printout the page which data is completed to receive during receiving it into faxs memory.

Unique Switch 021 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only TCF check time (in 100 ms units) Usage/Comments

If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the result, lengthen the TCF check time. Switch 3 2 1 0 Time 0000 0 ms 0001 100 ms 0010 200 ms 0011 300 ms 0100 400 ms 0101 500 ms 0110 600 ms 0111 700 ms 1000 800 ms Initial setting 1001 900 ms 1 0 1 0 1000 ms 1 0 1 1 1100 ms 1 1 0 0 1200 ms 1 1 0 1 1300 ms 1 1 1 0 1400 ms 1 1 1 1 1500 ms

3-64

Unique Switch 02x : Reception

Unique Switch 022 :
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 1 1 Adjust Document storage method bit Usage/Comments 7 6 5 1 0 1 JBIG 1 0 0 MG3 0 1 1 MMR Initial setting 0 1 0 MR 0 0 1 MH 0 0 0 IMAGE Used to determine the encoding method at DIS declaration. Used to determine the encoding method at DIS declaration.

2 1 0

0 0 0

MMR reception 0: No 1: Yes JBIG reception 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

Unique Switch 023 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Receiving fax in 600 dpi (Super fine) 0: No 1: Yes Encoding method Usage/Comments

Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.

1 0

0 0

Used to determine the encoding method at DIS declaration. Specify the encoding method. bit 10 11 10 01 00

MMR MR MH Machine capability (default)

Unique Switch 024 ~ 028 Factory use only

3-65

Unique Switch 02x : Reception

Unique Switch 029 :
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Displays the message No Network Connection. 0 : Yes 1 : No Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Set this switch to 1 will delete the message No Network Connection. Use this switch if the machine is not used in a network.

5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

3-66

Unique Switch 03x : Modem

Unique Switch 030 :
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only 3429 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3200 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 3000 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes 2800 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only 2400 baud symbol rate when communicating at V.34 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

If the error frame often occurs because of the symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to 1 mask that symbol rate and keep down the occurrence of error frame.

1 0

0 1

See above (switch 5 to 2).

Unique Switch 031 Factory use only

3-67

Unique Switch 03x : Modem

Unique Switch 032 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only ANSam output time 0: 3 seconds 1: 4 seconds Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to 1 when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.

1 0

0 1

Unique Switch 033 ~034 Factory use only Unique Switch 035 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Reception level at CED 2100 Hz Usage/Comments

Measure for false detection caused by noise. Adjust this switch when CED is falsely detected and T.1.1 error occurs. bit 32 11 10 01 00

-51 dBm -48 dBm -41 dBm -45 dBm

(default)

1 0

1 0

Factory use only Factory use only

Unique Switch 036 Factory use only

3-68

Unique Switch 03x : Modem

Unique Switch 037 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only The delay before postmessage is transmitted Usage/Comments

If retraining occurs due to the low reception signal level and few delay of the telephone line, it may overlap the second post-message. In this case, increase the delay before the post-message is transmitted. 0 ms 100 ms 200 ms 300 ms Switch 4: 0 0 1 1 Switch 3: 0 1 0 1

2 1 0

0 0 1

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

Unique Switch 038 ~ 039 --- Factory use only

3-69

Unique Switch 04x :Scanner

Unique Switch 040 :
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Show the lamp in error. 0: FBS lamp error 1: DADF lamp error Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0 0

Unique Switch 041 ~ 042 --- Factory use only Unique Switch 043 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Set the image quality of thumbnail at preview function 0: Standard 1: Improved image Conform the numbers of line on the front page and back page 0: Conform to the front page 1: Do not conform Usage/Comments

When you set this switch to 1, the image quality of thumbnails improve while free memory space on the compact flash memory card will decline which means less communicatec documents, user box data, or security print document can be saved.

Unique Switch 044 --- Factory use only

3-70

Unique Switch 04x :Scanner

Unique Switch 045 :
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document leading edge 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments This switch is a measure to avoid document jam that occurs when documents with punch holes are scanned. Always set the following switches together. Unique switch 045 bit 7 Unique switch 045 bit 6 Unique switch 045 bit 4 (i.e.) 00x0xxxx : Disable (Default) 11x1xxxx : Enable This switch is a measure to avoid document jam that occurs when documents with punch holes are scanned. Always set the following switches together. Unique switch 045 bit 7 Unique switch 045 bit 6 Unique switch 045 bit 4 (i.e.) 00x0xxxx : Disable (Default) 11x1xxxx : Enable This switch is a measure to avoid document jam that occurs when documents with punch holes are scanned. Always set the following switches together. Unique switch 045 bit 7 Unique switch 045 bit 6 Unique switch 045 bit 4 (i.e.) 00x0xxxx : Disable (Default) 11x1xxxx : Enable Set the maximum punch hole size when unique switch 045- 7, 6, and 4 are activate. bit 3210 size 1111 15 mm (0.59 inch) 1110 14 mm (0.55 inch) 1101 13 mm (0.51 inch) 1100 12 mm (0.47 inch) 1011 11 mm (0.43 inch) 1010 10 mm (0.39 inch) 1001 9 mm (0.35 inch) 1000 8 mm (0.31 inch) 0111 7 mm (0.27 inch) 0110 6 mm (0.23 inch) 0101 5 mm (0.19 inch) 0100 4 mm (0.15 inch) 0011 3 mm (0.11 inch) 0010 2 mm (0.07 inch) 0001 1 mm (0.03 inch) 0000 10 mm (0.39 inch)

Enables measures for false detection of punch holes as a document trailing edge 0: No 1: Yes

5 4

0 0

Factory use only Enable measures for false detection of punch holes as a document leading edge 0: No 1: Yes

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0

Punch hole maximum size adjustment Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

Unique Switch 046 ~ 049 --- Factory use only

3-71

Unique Switch 05x : Printer

Unique Switch 050 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Smoothing in Hyper-Fine (400 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Super-Fine (200 x 400 dpi) mode 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing at printing lists 0: No 1: Yes Smoothing in Normal mode 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

Smooths the data scanned in each resolution mode.

Unique Switch 051 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Give priority to fit to paper 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

When the received fax is larger than paper in cassette, 0 will print them on suitable size while 1 will reduce to the size to fit then on one paper.

Unique Switch 052 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Printing margin adjustment 0: Normal 1: No margin Usage/Comments

3-72

Unique Switch 05x : Printer

Unique Switch 053 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Adjust Printer density adjustment. Switch Usage/Comments 76543210 Settings 00000000 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00001001 00001011 : Not available Lightest : : Normal Initial setting : Darkest Not available

Unique Switch 054 ~ 059 Factory use only

3-73

Unique Switch 06x : Remote reception

Unique Switch 060 ~ 066 Factory use only Unique Switch 067 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only CNG detection during OGM output in ANS Ready 0: Yes 1: No Number of detection DTMF Usage/Comments

3 2 1 0

0 0 1 1

Sets the number of detection the DTMF during Ans/ Fax Ready mode. Switch 3 2 1 0 Number of detection 0000 Not detect 0001 1 0010 2 0011 3 Initial setting 0100 4 0101 5 0110 6 0111 7 1000 8 1001 9 1010 10 1111 15

Unique Switch 068 and 069 Factory use only

3-74

Unique Switch 07x : Operation

Unique Switch 070 Factory use only Unique Switch 071 :
Switch 7 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Line monitor in Quick memory transmission 0: Off 1: On Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Rx document to polling document 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Usage/Comments

6 5 4 3 2 1

0 0 0 0 0 0

Retrieve the document received in the memory by polling transmission.

Unique Switch 072 :

Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only DRAM backup 0 : No 1 : Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0

Unique Switch 073 ~ 074 Factory use only

3-75

Unique Switch 07x : Operation

Unique Switch 075 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Journal list printing order 0: From old history 1: From new history Key press time to activate sleep mode Usage/Comments

2 1 0

0 1 1

Set how long to press <Energy Save> to activate sleep mode Switch 2 1 0 time 111 7 seconds 110 6 seconds 101 5 seconds 100 4 seconds 011 3 seconds 010 2 seconds 001 1 second 000 0 second

Unique Switch 076 Factory use only

3-76

Unique Switch 07x : Operation

Unique Switch 077 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 0 0 1 Adjust Print timeout on PCL text printing (at local printing) 1 second/step Adjustable range: 1~15 seconds bit 7654 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 : 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000 Usage/Comments 15 seconds 14 seconds 13 seconds 12 seconds 11 seconds 10 seconds 5 seconds 4 seconds 3 seconds 2 seconds 1 second 1 second

(default)

Adjust image printing timeout by unique switch 079 bit 7~4. 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

Unique Switch 078 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Print timeout on GDI (at local printing) 5 seconds/step Adjustment range: 5~75 seconds Usage/Comments

bit

3210 1111 1110 1101 1100 : 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000

75 seconds 70 seconds 65 seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 25 seconds 20 seconds 15 seconds 10 seconds 5 seconds 5 seconds (default)

3-77

Unique Switch 07x : Operation

Unique Switch 079 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 Initial Setting 0 1 1 0 Adjust Print timeout on PCL (at local printing) 5 seconds/step Adjustment range: 5~75 seconds bit 7654 1111 1110 1101 1100 : 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000 Usage/Comments 75 seconds 70 seconds 65 seconds 60 seconds 30 seconds 25 seconds 20 seconds 15 seconds 10 seconds 5 seconds 5 seconds (default)

Adjust text printing timeout by unique switch 077 bit 7~4. 3 2 1 0 0 1 0 0 Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

3-78

Unique Switch 08x : Miscellaneous

Unique Switch 080 Factory use only Unique Switch 081 :
Switch 7 6 5 Initial Setting 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Print dialing error on journal 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0

Unique Switch 082 :

Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 1 0 Adjust Factory use only Copy all data at Copy Machine Settings 0: No 1: Yes Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments Use this switch when you replace the main control panel.

5 4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 1 0 0

Unique Switch 083 ~ 084 Factory use only

3-79

Unique Switch 08x : Miscellaneous

Unique Switch 085 :
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Print/Send the consumable order sheet when the drum is near end 0: Yes 1: No Print/Send the consumable order sheet when toner is near empty 0: Yes 1: No Receive time stamp position 0: Outside the print area 1: Inside the print area Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Usage/Comments

NOTE
For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.17 Consumable order sheet on page 3-109.

NOTE
For this feature to work correctly, you must register several items. See 3.17 Consumable order sheet on page 3-109. Set where to print the time stamp.

3 2 1 0

0 0 0 1

Unique Switch 086 ~ 087 Factory use only

Unique Switch 088 :

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Keep preview function ON when time over has occurred 0: Yes 1: No Usage/Comments

Unique Switch 089 Factory use only

3-80

Unique Switch 09x : Miscellaneous

Unique Switch 090 ~ 097 Factory use only Unique Switch 098 :
Switch 7 6 Initial Setting 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Respond warm-up condition as ready on SNMP 0 : Respond as warm-up 1 : Respond as ready Usage/Comments To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this switch to 1. When this switch is 1, SNMP manager such as WebJetAdmin displays Ready even if the printer is in warm-up condition. When the printer warms up while it is receiving information on Row port, the job will be divided. The latter divided job will be printed with initial font as it has no font information. This setting will avoid this font issue. This setting will be active when the machine is restarted. To print on Row port correctly by AS400, set this switch to 1. When this switch is 1, SNMP manager such as WebJetAdmin displays Ready even if the printer is in sleep condition. When the printer sleeps while it is receiving information on Row port, printing will be disabled. To enable printing again, this error should be recovered with administrator authority, and this setting will avoid this issue. This setting will be active when the machine is restarted.

Respond Sleep condition as ready on SNMP 0 : Respond as sleep 1 : Respond as ready

4 3 2 1 0

0 0 0 0 0

Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only

3-81

Unique Switch 09x : Miscellaneous

Unique Switch 099 :
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Enable Quick TWAIN 0: No 1: Yes Usage/Comments

You can enable Quick TWAIN instead of the standard TWAIN box operation. See 3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings on page 3-157.

3-82

3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings

User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier (TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the units Random Access Memory (RAM) and on the CF memory card that is attached to the network board. This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <2>.

2. Press [Yes].

3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults. This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings, address book entries to help in reprogramming this information. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <3>.

2. Press [Yes]. The clear modes initialize the following data : All RAM Clear Machine parameter Memory Switch Unique Switch Consumable order sheet Life moniter Jounal Stored images Serial number Network Switch Network Capture Dial Option Conversion IFAX Detail Status : Cleared Blank : Not cleared

User Data Clear

3-83

3.8 T.30 Monitor

In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC structure is shown below.
Preamble Binary coded information

Non-standard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)

Flag

Flag

Address

Control

Facsimili control l field

Facsimili information field

Frame checking sequence (FCS)

The information in this portion is printed in the T.30 monitor.

The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.

3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication. 1. From ready, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <5>.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print. 1. Press <Job Confirm. / Fax Cancel>. 2. Press the [History] tab and select [Fax Tx] or [Fax Rx]. 3. Select the desired communication. 4. Press <*>, <0>, <5>. 5. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3-84

3.8.3 How to see the print out

(Example for fax transmission)

(Example for fax reception)

TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal. TCF : TCF check sequence PIX : Image data [V17 MMR A3 0 F E] Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, blank=ECM off) Mode (S=8dot/mm x 15.4l/mm F=Fine N=Normal) Receiver's minimum scan line time capability Recording width document size Compressing method Data signalling rate

3-85

NSF, NSC, NSS:

NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30. The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer code. TxFrame RxFrame D A T A NSF 20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 The third byte is the manufactures code The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H The first byte indicates the country code Indicates the NSF code

CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code, and subscribers telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example. Code Value Code Value Code Value Code Value 20 Space 32 2 35 5 38 8 30 0 33 3 36 6 39 9 31 1 34 4 37 7 2B + An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as: TxFrame RxFrame D A T A CIS 30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20 0 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 20 20 20 20 20

DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc. TxFrame RxFrame D A T A DIS 00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00 The bits are in the following order: ( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17) (32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41) (56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57) Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number: Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex Binary Hex 0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)

Binary 1100 1101 1110 1111

3-86

A transmission with PPR signal:

The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal. TxFrame RxFrame D A T A PPS MPS BF 4F 00 00 0F PPR BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value. So in the above case: Pages: 00 means one page Blocks: 00 means one block Frames: 0F means 16 frames In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0" and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.

3.9 Printer maintenance mode

In case of followings, use this mode. When you have replaced the Fuser unit and/or Transfer roller. When Checkout error : XX message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of the Checkout error : XX error message. To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode.

3.9.1 When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller

To access the printer maintenance mode: 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>. 2. Press [Set Replace Counter].

3. If youve replaced the fuser, select [Replace Fuser]. If you have replaced the transfer roller skip to step 5.

3-87

4. Press [Yes].

5. If youve replaced the transfer roller, select [Replace Transfer Belt]. 6. Press [Yes]. The machine goes back to ready mode.

3.9.2 When Checkout error : XX message is displayed

To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the Checkout error : XX error message. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>. 2. Press [Service Call]. 3. The kind of printer error will be displayed.

NOTE
See 4.3 Checkout error on page 4-3 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each are outlined.

3.9.3 Register the e-mail location

To send the service error via e-mail, register the location using this mode. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>. 2. Press [Service Call e-mail]. 3. Select [Send Service Call E-Mail].

3-88

4. Select [ON] and press [Enter].

5. Select [E-mail Mail Address 1]. 6. Enter the e-mail address and press [Enter].

7. To send the service report to another location, press [E-mail Address 2] and/or [E-mail Address 3] and enter the location. Otherwise, skip to step 8. 8. Select [E-Mail Subject]. 9. Edit the e-mail subject if needed, and press [Enter].

When you press [Initial] and then [Yes], the subject will be set to the machine default. 10. Press <Reset> to go back to the stand by mode.

3-89

3.10 Service Report Printing

You can print out a report that contains machines usage and error history.

3.10.1 Printing the Service Report

1. From ready, press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <7>.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3.10.2 Contents of the service report

NOTE
Some device on the service report may not be equipped on your machine.

Contents of the header

Detail Current date. The machine serial number. The registered TTI or the Customers name registered in Consumable Order Sheet. 3 Fax Number The fax number registered in User Install. Cust Tel The telephone number registered in Consumable Order Sheet. 4 Installation Date The date the machine was installed. (The date set at User install.) Days Used / Work Days Days since the machine is installed. / Days the machine has worked. 5 ROM Version The ROM version of Main ROM, OfficeBridge, Panel, and PDL ROM. The header is common for simple report and detailed report.

Line 1 2

Item Date Unit Serial # Cust Name

3-90

First page of the report.

5 6

Paper size per unit Number of total printed pages Number of pages printed on current drum (I/C) umber of pages printed after the resettable counter is cleared and the cleared date. N 2 Number of printed pages based on counter calculating procedure (Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper) 3 Printer trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is cleared) Number of jammed pages Number of printed pages per jammed section 4 Number of scanned pages / Number of scanned times umber of scanned pages / Number of scanned times after the resettable counter is N cleared and the cleared date 5 Number of scanned pages based on counter calculating procedure (Four legal size paper is counted five letter size paper) 6 Scanner trouble information (Total pages and the pages after the resettable counter is cleared) Number of document jammed pages per jammed section 7 Life counter The resettable counter cleared date is printed with six figure of year / month / date.

No. 1

Detail

3-91

Second page of the report

9 10

11

No. 8

9 10 11

Detail Number of printed pages per paper size and print job. Total printed pages Total printed pages on current drum (I/C) Number of printed pages per paper media and mode. Number of page per optional device and print job. Number of scanned pages per document size and mode

3-92

Third page of the report

12 13 14 15 16

17

18

19

No. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Detail Number of communication times per communication type Number of PC scan times Number of times advanced functions used Number of customer registered information Machine set-up information Number of fax communication error per error code Number of internet-fax communication error ( for engineers only)

3-93

Fourth page of the report

20 21

22

23

No. 20 21 22 23

Detail 20 latest scanner error histories 20 latest printer error histories Total machine memory (for engineers only)

Fifth page is for engineer only.

3-94

3.11 Monitor speaker

If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal sound with machines speaker during fax transaction. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <8>. 2. Select the monitor type from [ON until DIS] or [ON].

3. Select the speaker volume. To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [OFF].

3.12 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included are followings. Life monitor Test pattern print Stamp test Document feeding test Set background level Make color Gamma Select color Gamma

3.12.1 Life Monitor

This function displays the machine status. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Life Monitor]. 2. Press [Detail] to see the options.

ROM Ver.0 = displays main control board software version ROM Ver.1 = displays network software (OfficeBridge) version ROM Ver.2 = displays PDL (printer description language) version ROM Ver.3 = displays panel ROM version Display Item Scan Count Page Count 1 Tx (Transmission) Count Detail Cumulative total pages

3-95

Display Item Drum Recycled Drum Life 2 After Replaced After Caution Toner Recycled Toner Life After Replaced After Caution Fuser Replaced Fuser Life Xsfer Replaced Xfer Life Word Count (In Use)

5 Word Count (default) PCL PS3 (PS3 option) PDF (PDF direct print option) BC (Barcode font option) CY (Cyrillic font) CF PPM

Detail Number of times drum is replaced Current drum working time (x 10 seconds) Total printed pages on current drum Total printed pages since "Replace drum" warning is displayed Number of times toner cartridge is replaced Toner cartridge working time (x 10 seconds) Total printed pages on current toner cartridge Total printed pages since "Toner near end" warning is displayed Number of times fuser is replaced Current fuser working time (x 10 seconds) Number of times transfer roller is replaced Current transfer roller working time (x 10 seconds) The number of words used on display. If this words are less than the Word Count (default), some words may not be able to display. Translation is needed for the missing wording. The number of words the software uses.

Optional items status (Yes: Equipped, No: Not equipped)

Print pages per minute.

3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor.

3-96

3.12.2 Printer Test

The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below. Checkered Squares Paper Scum

Halftone

Halftone2

White

Black

Ladder

LED Head Test

6% Pattern

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Test Pattern Print]. 2. Select the desired pattern is displayed.

3-97

3. Select a cassette or tray that holds your desired paper size to test.

4. Enter the numbers of pages to print, and press [Print]. The selected pattern will be printed continuously. Press <Stop> to stop printing.

3.12.3 Stamp test

This mode tests the stamp. The stamp will be stamped on the document at a regular interval. 1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF). 2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Stamp test mode]. 3. Press [Start] to start the stamp test.

3.12.4 Feeder test

The feeder test discharges all documents in the automatic document feeder (ADF) at a constant speed and displays the document total in the LCD. 1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF). 2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Feeder Test]. 3. Press [Start] to start the feeder test.

4. Press [End] to exit the test mode.

3.12.5 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine. 3-98

3.12.6 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced; therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed. The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Background level]. 2. Select the scanner to adjust. 3. Press [Start].

After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the ready screen.

3.12.7 Make color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. The color gamma table adjusts RGB color balance, and is unique per machine because of the optical variation. Both the main board and compact flash memory card on the network board keep the color gamma table, and the same data will be saved on both parts when you make a color data though below operation. Perform this operation to remake the color gamma table when the following parts is replaced: Lamp Inverter Main board and compact flash memory card (replaced at the same time) Either of the following chart is required to make the color Gamma: 2007-01 No.20071020

NOTE
Use a clean chart that is not tanned or folder. 1. 2. 3. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Make Color Gamma]. Press [All clear] and clear the remaining data. When you press [Unit Clear] the data on the main control panel will be deleted. When you press [CF Clear] the data on the compact flash memory card will be deleted. Set the chart on FBS (Flat Bed Scanner), and press [Make FBS]. (Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.)

4. Set the chart on ADF, and press [Make ADF/F] or [Make ADF/B]. (Set the chart so that scanning starts from the chart top.) 5. Press [Close] to go back to test function menu. 3-99

3.12.8 Select color Gamma

The machine has a color gamma data table as color scanning correction data. A same color gamma table is kept on the main board and compact flash memory card on the network board. When one of the board is replaced, perform the following operation to remake the table on the other. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select [Select Color Gamma]. 2. Select the source to be copied. Select [CF] when the main board is replaced, and [MFP] when the compact flash memory card is replaced.

3. Check the LCD that Yes is displayed at both Unit and CF.

3.13 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <0>.

2. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3-100

3.14 Factory Functions

This function provides several machine machina test. Test list Test LED test LCD test Panel test SRAM check DRAM check RTC test Page memory check Pseudo ring test Serial number writing Contents Light on all the LED lamps to check that the lamps are working. Display test patterns on the LCD to check for dead pixel. Display the key name on the LCD when the key is pressed. You can check that the keys are working. Check that the SRAM is working in case that the registered fax numbers turn into garbage. Check that the DRAM is working correctly. Check also when the memory is expanded. Factory use only. Check that the page memory is working in case that the print images are wrong. Check the bell of external telephone and the pseudo ring. Factory use only.

3.14.1 LED Test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LED Test]. 2. Press <Start>.

Every time you press <Start> the LED illuminates in the following order: Green Red Blue All LEDs ON All LEDs OFF 3. Press <Stop> to complete the test.

3.14.2 LCD Test

This mode displays three test patterns in LCD. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [LCD Test]. 2. Press <Start> to turn the screen white.

Every time you press <Start> the LCD changes in the following order: While Yellow Purple Red Light blue Green Blue Black 3. Press <Stop> to complete the test. 3-101

3.14.3 Key Panel Test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Key Test]. 2. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will be displayed.

Key Copy Scan Fax Print My MFP Screen 1 to Screen7 Setting Login

Indication in LCD Copy Scan Fax Print My MFP Screen 1 to Screen 7 Settings Login

Key Basic / Advanced View Job Confirm /Fax Cancel Reset Numeric keys 1 to 10, *, # Stop Start Energy Save

Indication in LCD Basic / Advanced View Job Confirm /Fax Cancel Reset Tenkey 1 to 0, *, # Stop Start Energy Save

3. Press [Close] to complete the key panel test.

3.14.4 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time, TTI, etc are stored. The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique switches to factory defaults. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [SRAM Check]. 2. Press [Start]. The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the read/ write test is successful, the display will show OK. If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show NG with the address and the data name. 3. Press [Close] to complete the SRAM Check.

3-102

3.14.5 DRAM Check

This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [DRAM Check]. 2. Enter 0 to the Check area.

3. Press [Start]. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. 4. Press [Close] to complete the DRAM Check.

3.14.6 RTC(real time clock) Test

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

3.14.7 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Page Memory check]. 2. Select the desired checking area.

3. The machine starts checking and the result (Completed./Failed) will be shown in the display. If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (see 3.18 DRAM Clear), and then go back to step 1. 4. Press [Close] to complete the page memory check.

3-103

3.14.8 Pseudo ring test

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select [Pseudo ring test]. 2. Press [Start], to ring the bell.

3. Press [End] to stop. 4. Press [Close] to complete the pseudo ring test.

3.14.9 Serial number writing

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.

3-104

3.15 Line Tests

This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.

NOTE
To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line jack.

3.15.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Select [Relay].

3. Select the relay you want to test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

CML relay on DP relay on L relay on RI relay on

CML relay off DP relay off L relay off RI relay off

S relay on H relay on CONT24V relay on Hook key

S relay off H relay off CONT24V relay off

4. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.

3-105

3.15.2 Tonal Signal Test

The tonal signal test permits the units output tones to be monitored. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Press [Tonal]. 3. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

Refer to the table below. Signal None (stop signal) 400 Hz tone 600 Hz tone 1100 Hz tone 1300 Hz tone 2100 Hz tone 3000 Hz tone 3400 Hz tone FSK WHITE FSK BLACK FSK _W1_B1 V27_1200_2400 picture date V27_1600_4800 picture date V29_2400_7200 picture date V29_2400_9600 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_7200_W1_B1 picture date

Signal V17_2400_7200_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_7200_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_7200_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_9600_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_9600_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_12000_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_12000_W4_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B0 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W1_B4 picture date V17_2400_14400_W0_B1 picture date V17_2400_14400_W4_B1 picture date

Signal V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600 V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400 V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800 V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200 V34_34290_4800 ~ 33600 4. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.

NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.

3-106

3.15.3 DTMF Output Test

The DTMF output test permits the units DTMF tones to be monitored. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <2>. 2. Select [DTMF]. 3. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.

Display 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 AST SHARP

Signal DTMF0 (941 Hz + 1336 Hz) DTMF1 (697 Hz + 1209 Hz) DTMF2 (697 Hz + 1336 Hz) DTMF3 (697 Hz + 1477 Hz) DTMF4 (770 Hz + 1209 Hz) DTMF5 (770 Hz + 1336 Hz) DTMF6 (770 Hz + 1477 Hz) DTMF7 (852 Hz + 1209 Hz) DTMF8 (852 Hz + 1336 Hz) DTMF9 (852 Hz + 1477 Hz) DTMF6* (941 Hz + 1209 Hz) DTMF# (941 Hz + 1477 Hz)

Display ROW1 ROW2 ROW3 ROW4 COL1 COL2 COL3 COL4

Signal ROW1 (697 Hz) ROW2 (770 Hz) ROW3 (852 Hz) ROW4 (941 Hz) COL1 (1209 Hz) COL2 (1336 Hz) COL3 (1447 Hz) COL4 (1633 Hz)

4. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>. 5. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4. Otherwise, proceed to step 6. 6. To exit the DTMF output test, press [Close] under not tests.

NOTE
It may take several moments for output signal to change.

3-107

3.16 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode IMPORTANT

The machine is shipped with mirror carriage locked to protect the machines mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the machine, slide the scanner locking lever back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following: 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4> . 2. Select [OFF].

3. Select the energy save mode start time. If you chose [No], the setting adjustment is complete.
No Yes Low power mode : Sleep mode : Low power mode : Sleep mode : 1 minute 1 minute 15 minutes 60 minutes

4. Select [Yes] to change the energy save mode start time.

IMPORTANT
If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <4>, and [OFF].

3-108

3.17 Consumable order sheet

When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Dealers fax number Customers name Customers department Customers address 1 (Upper line) Customers address 2 (Lower line) Customers account Customers telephone number Customers fax number registered by Initial setting mode (Setting, User Install). Customers e-mail address Serial number of the unit Order item Description of the order item Quantity of the order item Payment options *1 Date of payment *1

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Dealers name Dealers code Dealers telephone number Dealers fax number Dealers e-mail address Comment *1 Place of the customer write his/her signature *1 Drum used percentage Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds) Drum life time Drum used percentage Total print pages Number of print pages after toner bottle or drum unit was replaced. ROM version

*1 These items should be entered manually.

3-109

3.17.1 Set consumable order sheet

1. Clear the junk data, if necessary. 2. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 3. Press [Order Sheet].

4. Press [Dealer Code].

5. Enter the Dealers code and press [Enter]. The code may be up to 10 characters in length.

6. Press [Dealer Name]. 7. Enter the Dealers name (Suppliers name) and press [Enter]. The name may be up to 30 characters in length.

3-110

8. Press [Dealer Tel No]. 9. Enter the distributors telephone number and press [Enter]. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.

10. Press [Dealer Fax No]. 11. Enter the dealers fax number and press [Enter]. The fax number may be up to 40 characters in length.

12. Press [Dealer e-mail]. 13. Enter the dealers e-mail address and press [Enter]. The e-mail address may be up to 50 characters in length.

14. Press [Cust Account #]. 15. Enter the customers account number and press [Enter]. The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length.

3-111

16. Press [Cust Name]. 17. Enter the customers account number and press [Enter]. The customers account number may be up to 30 characters in length.

18. Press [Client department]. 19. Enter the customers department and press [Enter]. The customers department may be up to 14 characters in length.

20. Press [Address 1]. 21. Enter the customers address for the upper row and press [Enter]. The customers address may be up to 50 characters in length.

22. Press [Address2]. 23. Enter the customers address for the lower row and press [Enter]. The customers address may be up to 50 characters in length.

3-112

24. Press [Cust Tel]. 25. Enter the customers phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.

26. Press [Price]. 27. Enter the price of toner cartridge and press [Enter].

28. Press [Order Sheet Setting]. 29. Select the way to deal with the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its designed life. If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.

30. When you have selected [e-mail] in step 29, press [e-mail Subject]. 31. Enter the subject when sending the consumable order sheet, and press [Enter].

When you press [Initial] and then [Yes], the subject will be set to the machine default. 32. Press [Close] to exit the order sheet setting.

3-113

3.17.2 Clear consumable order sheet

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 2. Select [Clear Order Sheet]. 3. Press [Yes].

3.17.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customers information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <5>. 2. Select [Order Sheet List]. 3. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3-114

3.18 DRAM Clear

This clears the image storage memory. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <1>, <6>. 2. Press [Yes].

3.19 Life monitor maintenance

3.19.1 Resettable counter clearing
Clear the counter of the machine. The following counter will be cleared: Scanned pages per mode (copy/scan/fax/print) Scanned times per mode (copy/scan/fax) Pages per scanner part (ADF/FBS) Times per scanner part (ADF/FBS) Scanner jam information Print pages per cassette Jammed pages per cassette Jammed pages per print part 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>.

2. Select [Initialize resettable counter]. 3. Press [Yes].

3-115

3.19.2 Reentering the life monitor

Your machine maintains the life monitor value on the main control board. When the main control board is replaced, reenter the life monitor. Number of drum replacements : Number of times drum cartridge is replaced Drum Rotation Time : Time how long the drum has rotated (x 10 seconds) Number of pages after drum replaced : Print pages on current drum cartridge Number of pages after drum caution : Print pages after the Drum near end caution is displayed Number of toner replacements : Number of times toner cartridge is replaced Toner Rotation Time : Time how long the agitator has rotated (x 10 seconds) Number of pages after toner replaced : Print pages on current toner cartridge Number of pages after toner caution : Print pages after the Toner almost empty caution is displayed Fuser Replaced Count: Number of times fuser is replaced Fuser Life : Time how long current fuser is working (x 10 seconds) Transfer Replaced Count: Number of times transfer roller is replaced Transfer Life : Time how long current transfer roller is working (x 10 seconds) 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <0>. 2. Press [# of drum replacements]. 3. Enter the value and press [Enter].

4. Press [Drum Rotation Time]. 5. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 6. Press [# of pages after drum replaced]. 7. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 8. Press [# of pages after drum caution]. 9. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 10. Press [# of toner replacements]. 11. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 12. Press [Toner Rotation Time]. 13. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 14. Press [# of pages after toner replaced]. 15. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 16. Press [# of pages after toner caution]. 17. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 18. Press [Fuser Replaced Count]. 19. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 20. Press [Fuser Life]. 21. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 22. Press [Transfer Replaced Count]. 23. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 24. Press [Transfer Life]. 25. Enter the value and press [Enter]. 26. Press [Close].

3-116

3.20 Sensor input test

This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name changes from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF. For example, when open the paper cassette 1, the CAS1:OFF change to CAS1: ON. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2>. 2. Press either [Scanner Sensor Status] or [Printer Sensor Status].

Scanner Sensor Status Name Status TXIL OFF: Scanner cover is open ON: Scanner cover is close DS1 OFF: No document ON: Document existing DS3 OFF: No document ON: Document existing DRS OFF: No document ON: Document existing Printer Sensor Status Name Status THRM Show the temperature of Heater roller. BAT Show the voltage of the SDRAM backup battery. TS1 Show the remaining toner level. HP No sensor on this machine PSS OFF: No paper ON: Detect paper SWBK OFF: No paper ON: Detect paper DRNW OFF: Drum new ON: Drum used OFF: Developing unit new DVNW ON: Developing unit used CAS1 OFF: Cassette 1 is close ON: Cassette is open SIDE_OP OFF: Side cover 1 is close ON: Side cover 1 is open CAS2 OFF: Cassette 2 is close ON: Cassette 2 is open JAM2_OP OFF: Side cover 2 is close ON: Side cover 2 is open CASM OFF: Bypass tray is close ON: Bypass tray is open FRNT_OP OFF: Front cover is close ON: Front cover is open

Name HS DS2 APS

Status OFF: Mirror outer than HS ON: Mirror inner than HS OFF: No document ON: Document existing OFF: Platen cover is open ON: Platen cover is closed

Name TEMP

Status Show the internal temperature of machine.

TS2 PDS

Show the remaining toner level. OFF: No paper ON: Detect paper jam

DREX

OFF: No drum ON: Detect drum

PES1

OFF: No paper in cassette 1 ON: Detect paper is cassette 1

PES2

OFF: No paper in cassette 2 ON: Detect paper is cassette 2

PESM

OFF: No paper on bypass tray ON: Detect paper on bypass tray

NOTE
CAS2, PES2 and JAM2_OP do not change, when there is no second cassette attached. 3-117

3.21 Printer diagnostic mode

This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <3>.

2. Select the device you want to set to ON. Fan Full : Rotate the fan motor with full power Rx Motor : Rotate the Rx motor Dup Dir CW : Rotate the Duplex Motor clockwise (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW). Dup Mtr : Rotate the duplex motor Shift Mtr : Rotate the shift motor. Clutch 1 : Turn on clutch of cassette 1 Clutch 2 : Turn on clutch of cassette 2 Man Clutch : Rotate Bypass tray feed clutch Reg Clutch : Turn on Register roller clutch ALL OFF : Turn the all device to off 3.Press the key once again will turn the device off. Press [All OFF] to turn all device off at once. 4. Press [Close] to exit.

3-118

3.22 Network service mode

This mode provides the following two items: Delete Administrator's password Initialize Authentication method

3.22.1 Delete Administators password

You can clear the administator's password. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>. 2. Press [Delete Manager].

3. Press [Yes].

3.22.2 Initialize Authentication Method

You can initialize the authentication mode, and return it to its factory default (Stand-alone). 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <4>. 2. Press [Initialize Authentication Method]. 3. Press [Yes].

3-119

3.23 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <9> .

2. Press [Close] to return to ready mode.

3.24 Set Service Report

3.24.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items: Destinations here to send the service report. Up to three fax numbers or 2 e-mail W adrdresses can be registered. Report format Select between simple report or detailed report. Period he report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on T a determined date and time. 1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>. 2. Press [Setting].

3. Press [Send Service Report].

3-120

4. Select [Fax] or [E-mail], and press [Enter].

5. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Fax Number 1] then [ON] and [Enter]. When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Address 1]. 6. Confirm the destination, and press [Enter].

Edit the fax number or e-mail address, if necessary. 7. If you want to send the service report to other destinations, press [Fax Number 2], [E-mail Address 2] or [E-mail Address 3] and enter the destinations. 8. Press [Report Format]. 9. Select the report format, and press [Enter].

10. Press [Period]. 11. Select the period, and press [Enter].

3-121

12. When you have selected [Interval] in step 11, enter the sending interval and press [Enter]. When you have selected [Monthly] in step 11, enter the sending date and time (12-hour format) and press [Enter].

14. When you have selected [Fax] in step 4, press [Close]. When you have selected [E-mail] in step 4, press [E-mail Subject]. 15. Enter the e-mail subject when sending the service report, and press [Enter].

When you press [Initial] and then [Yes], the subject will be set to the machine default. 16. Press [Close].

3.24.2 Print the service report

To clear the information of service report: 1. Press <Setting>, <4>, <2>. 2. Press [Service Report]. 3. Select [ON] or [OFF] for each settings, and press [Yes].

3.25 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source. For more detail, see 5.3 Adjustment.

3-122

3.26 Reset printer trouble

This mode clears the service call. Clear the warning when the trouble is settled. If fuser warming up error is settled, turn the machine OFF and ON following this operation. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <5>. 2. Press [Yes].

3. Turn the power OFF and then ON.

3.27 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface of them. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <6>. 2. Select the roller to rotate, and press [ON].

3. Press [Start] to rotate the roller.

3-123

3.28 Key counter mode

This function is for Foreign Device Interface option). If you have attached the key counter to the machine activate this mode to let it count the printed-paper. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <0>. 2. Press [ON] and then [Enter].

3.29 Network switch mode

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <1>. 2. Press [Parameter Edit].

When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value. 3. Call up the desired parameter by pressing [ ] or [ ], or by pressing the numeric keypad.

3-124

4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box.

5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen. Press [Back] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen. You can confirm the initial setting of each parameter by the Network Switch List. The Network Switch List will be printed by pressing [Parameter Print].

Network switch 000: Factory use only Network switch 001:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Adjust Usage/Comments

IP address flag 0 : Send Internet fax character strings 1 : Send IP address

Choose which to use as HELE/EHLO command parameter.

Network switch 002:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Maximum session times of SMTP Usage/Comments Set up the maximum session times. The number between 1 to 32 are available. 00011111 : 00001001 : 00000001 00000000 32 times 10 times 2 times 1 time (default)

3-125

Network switch 003:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Adjust Number of retry times for archive transmission Usage/Comments Set up the retry times for archive transmission. This setting is adopted for the following transmission when an available destination is set. Transmission to a shared folder E-mail transmission 11111111 255 times : 00001111 15 times (default) : 00000001 1 time 00000000 No transmission

Network switch 004:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Internet Fax dialing interval 11111111 : 00111100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 Usage/Comments 255 seconds 60 seconds 2 seconds 1 second 3 seconds (default)

Network switch 005 ~ 006: Factory use only Network switch 007:
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Usage/Comments

Print banner page on LPD protocol 0: Yes 1: No

When you set this switch to 1, the banner page is not printed on LPD protocol even when the printer receives the print command.

3-126

Network switch 008:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting Adjust Usage/Comments

Send Host name (Option 12) to DHCP server 0: Yes 1: No Send FQDN (Option 81) to DHCP server 0: Yes 1: No

Send Host name (Option 12) to DHCP server when acquiring IP address. If DHCP server is configured on dynamic updates, it registers the host name to the DNS server. Send FQDN (Option 81) to DHCP server when acquiring IP address. If DHCP server is configured on dynamic updates, it registers the FQDN to the DNS server.

Network switch 009 ~ 010: Factory use only Network switch 011:
Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Synchronizing interval of internettime between machine and SNTP server 11111111 : 00111100 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 Usage/Comments 255 minutes 60 minutes 2 minutes 1 minute 15 minutes (default)

Network switch 012:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust Maximum permissible hours of difference in machine and SNTP server Usage/Comments When the difference in machine and SNTP server is smaller than the set value, the machine does not refresh the time. 00011000 : 00000010 00000001 00000000 24 hours 2 hours 1 hour Alwayss refreshes time (default)

Network switch 013 ~ 016: Factory use only

3-127

Network switch 017:

Switch 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Initial Setting Adjust Usage/Comments

Error mail judgement 0 : Judges as error mail 1 : Not judge as error mail

Set whether to judge a received e-mail with a header that has only <> in Return-Path as error mail. When it is judged as error mail, only the first page of that e-mail text will be processed.

Network switch 018 ~ 099: Factory use only

3-128

3.30 Touch panel adjustment

Correct the X, Y on the touch panel. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <6>. 2. Touch the left upper corner of the display, and press <Start>.

3. Touch the right bottom corner of the display, and press <Start>.

3.31 Printer control parameter mode

The following two settings are available for the optional print controller is attached: Synchronize cassette designation command and paper size designation command to HP (Switch 27) Change barcode font width (Switch 28) 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <7>. 2. Select [Parameter Edit].

When you press [Parameter Clear] and then [Yes], all the parameters return to their default value. 3. Call up the desired switch by pressing [ ]or[ ],or by pressing the numeric keypad. 4. Select the desired parameter by pressing the box. 5. Adjust the parameter, and press [Enter]. To navigate through the machine parameter settings: The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right). Press [ ] or [ ] of the cursor key to move the cursor. Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or [ ] or [ ], to change the bit value. Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter. 6. If you want to set other parameter, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7. 7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to ready screen. 3-129

Printer control parameter 000 ~ 026 : Factory use only Printer control parameter 027 :
bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Setting 0 Adjust Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Factory use only Cassette designation command 0: Default 1: HP Paper size designation command 0: Default 1: HP PCL5 Default 7 2 1 4 5 PCL5 Default 2 6 3 1 27 26 25 24 114 46 45 100 44 102 81 80 90 71 72 91 101 115 116 117 118 Some default cassette designation commands differ from those of HP. (See table below.) To use HP command, set this bit to "1". Some default paper size designation commands differ from those of HP. (See table below.) To use HP command, set this bit to "1". Usage/Comments

Cassette Auto Bypass tray Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Paper size Letter Ledger Legal Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 F4 B4(JIS) B5(JIS) B5 B6(JIS) Half Letter COM10 Monarch DL Postcard D. Postcard C5 Custom 8K 16K Chyou4 Kaku2

HP 7 2 4 1 5

PCLXL Default 1 2 4 5 6 PCLXL Default 0 4 1 3 5 2 16 17 19 10 11 12 18 20 6 7 9 14 15 8 21 22 23 24

HP 1 2 3 4 5

HP 2 6 3 1 27 26 25 24 114 46 45 100 44 102 81 80 90 71 72 91 101 115 116 117 118

HP 0 4 1 3 5 2 16 17 10 11 12 18 6 7 9 14 15 8 19 20 -

-: No corresponding command 3-130

Printer control parameter 028 :

bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Initial Adjust Setting 0 Change barcode font 0 width 0 0 0 0 0 Usage/Comments Change barcode fonts wider or narrower by step. The steps are from 7 to -7, but some fonts are limited in available steps. And some fonts cannot be changed. For details, see table below. 10000111 Narrower : 10000100 : 00000000 Selected font : 00000100 : 00000111 Wider

Code 128 1 2 3 4 5 6 Code 39 1 2 3 4 5

Code 128 Condensed Code 128 Condensed Bold Code 128 Code 128 Bold Code 128 Expanded Code 128 Expanded Bold BC 3of9 Thin BC 3of9 Light BC 3of9 BC 3of9 Semi BC 3of9 Heavy

Narrow

Wide Narrow

Wide Narrow

Codabar 1 Codabar Condensed 2 Codabar 3 Codabar Expanded I2of5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Upc 1 2 3 4 5 6 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Light Interleaved 2of5 Light Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Interleaved 2of5 Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Semi Interleaved 2of5 Semi Interleaved 2of5 Narrow Bold Interleaved 2of5 Bold UPC/EAN Condensed UPC/EAN UPC/EAN Condensed Bold UPC/EAN Bold UPC/EAN Expanded UPC/EAN Expanded Bold

Wide Narrow

Wide Narrow

Wide

Printer control parameter 029 ~ 099 : Factory use only

3-131

3.32 Network capture (Packet capture)

You can capture the packet data the machine has sent and received, and download it from the web browser or sent it to an e-mail address. When you read the data using a packet analyzing tool such tcpdump, you can use it as a subsidiary tool to detect the cause of transmission problem. There are two ways to capture the packet data: capturing from web browser and from the machine control panel.

3.32.1 Capturing packet data from the web browser

1. Start the web browser on computer. 2. Type the machines IP address in the URL address field followed by /service. e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service 3. Enter login ID and password. ID : muratec Password : service 4. Click [Network Capture]. 5. Enter the Capture Parameter. Refer to Setting details if needed.

6. 7. 8. 9.

Enter the Output Method. Refer to Setting details if needed. Click [Save]. Click [Capture Start]. Press [File Tx] when capturing has finished.

NOTE
When sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When you do not send the captured data, press [File Delete] to delete them.

3-132

3.32.2 Capturing packet data from machine control panel

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <8>. 2. Press [Capture Settings].

3. Set up the detailed capture setting. Refer to 3.32.3 Setting details if needed.

4. Press [Close]. 5. Press [Transmission Method]. 6. Press [Transmission Method].

7. Select the method, and press [Enter]. 8. Press either [e-mail Settings], [Folder Setting] or [FTP Settings] and enter the destination. Refer to 3.32.3 Setting details if needed. 9. Press [Close]. 10. Press [Capture Start], and then [Yes]. 11. Press [Send] and then [Yes] when the capture has finished.

NOTE
hen sending the capture data has succeeded, the captured data will be deleted automatically. When W you do not send the captured data, press [Delete] and then [Yes] to delete them. o cancel capturing, press [Capture Stop]. T

3-133

3.32.3 Setting details

The following settings are available for capturing packets: Target All Host : To capture the packets between the machine and all hosts, select this. Specific Host : o capture the packets between the machine and specific host, seT lect this. Enter the host name in the Host field. You can enter only IP address when you enter it from the machine control panel. Select the protocol to capture. You can select multiple protocols. Enter the port number or service name to capture. If this field is empty, all ports and services are captured. You can enter only port numbers when you enter it from the machine control panel. Port number entering sample : 21, 80, 88 Service name entering sample: ftp, http, kerberos Enter the number of packets to capture. When this field is not entered, capturing does not complete. You can enter number from 64 to 20,000. Enter how much bites to retrieve from one packet. You can enter number from 1 to 1514 bites. Set up optional tcpdump items. However the following parapmeters will be ignored even when they are entered: -w : save file -c : number of packets -s : Each capture size from one packet This field is not available from the machine control panel.

Protocol Port / Service

# of Packet

Packet Size Free

Enter either of the following three output method: Mail Folder FTP Enter the e-mail address to send the data by e-mail. The address book is not available. Enter the folder path, account and password to send the data to a shared folder. Folder shortcuts are not available. Enter the FTP server folder path, account and password to send the data to a FTP server. The shortcuts are not available.

3-134

3.33 Storage maintenance

The storage on the OfficeBridge is a Compact Flash (CF) memory card. The following operations are available with this function: Disable CF Storage : Permanently disables the CF card from being read to prevent data from being accessed when the unit is disposed. Resetting Storage : Initializes the CF card. The data in the CF card will be erased and the card will be reformatted. This function can be useful when data on the CF card is corrupted and causing the machine to malfunction.

3.33.1 Erasing storage

CAUTION
When the storage is erased, the CF memory card is disabled. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>. 2. Press [Disable CF Storage].

3. Press [Yes].

4. The machine reboots from itself.

3-135

3.33.2 Resetting storage

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <5>, <9>. 2. Press [Storage Reset]. 3. Press [Yes].

4. The machine reboots from itself.

3.33.3. How to upgrade your OfficeBridge memory

When you upgrade the CF memory card, the settings and image data will not be copied to the new card automatically. Follow the procedures described bellow: 1. Backup the image data in the CF memory card to a network folder using the Document Backup function on OfficeBridge. For details, refer to the OfficeBridge Guide section 3, Backing Up Documents. 2. Set Unique switch 082 bit 6 to 1. 3. Export the machine settings to a USB memory using the Mirroring function on the control panel. For details, refer to the Administrators Guide section 2, Mirroring the Machine Settings. 4. Replace the CF memory card to the new one. 5. When you restart the machine, you will be asked for the administrators password. Enter the password. (See 3.33.4 About Storage replacement operation.) 6. Import the machine settings from the USB memory using the Mirroring function. 7. Reset Unique switch 082 bit 6 to 0. You cannot import the image data to the new CF memory card. The backup image data will be displayed on OfficeBridge when the Backup Document Display function is enabled. For details, refer to OfficeBridge Guide section 3, Specifying the Backup Document Display.

3.33.4 About Storage replacement operation

In the following cases, the display asks you to enter the Administrators password. In such cases, enter the Administrator password of the former device. When CF memory card used by another machine is attached. When CF memory card is removed and updated. When either the main control board or the network board is replaced. When unique switch 82 bit 6 is set to 1 and the machine setting data are imported.

3-136

3.34 Coverage Rate

You can set the toner coverage rate of paper. This will be the base to calculate the toner consumption of the users. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <6>, <0>. 2. Enter the coverage rate, and press [Enter].

3.35 Service function menu

All the field service modes are available from the menu. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <7>, <7>. 2. Select the desired service function to use.

3.36 Wire cleaning warning

This mode makes to display the cleaning warning for drum charge wire an print head in a certain interval (hour=drum rotation). 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <8>, <6>. 2. Press [ON]. 3. Input the interval in hour, and press [Enter].

3-137

3.37 Installing language

You can install, edit or delete languages on the machine that is prepared in an USB memory. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <1>. 2. Connect the USB memory on which the language data is stored. 3. Press [Add].

To edit an installed language, select a language and press [Edit]. To delete an installed language, select a language and press [Delete], [Yes]. A default install language cannot be deleted.

4. Press the box next to Panel.,

5. Browse the file and press [Enter]. 6. Press the box next to WebUl. 7. Browse the file and press [Enter]. 8. Click [Add]. The added language will be displayed in Language menu (<Setting> [Management] [User Install]). When you select the installed language, machine prompts you to reboot the machine.

3-138

3.38 Counter information maintenance

The machine has the counter data saved on SRAM (main control panel), CF memory card (network board) and FRAM (panel board) with its serial number connected. If for some reasons these serial numbers do not match, maintenance the data manually.

NOTE
The maintenance screen is normally displayed when the machine is turned on. Follow step 2. To maintenance the data manually, start operation from step 1. 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <3>. 2. Check the counter data. To copy the counter data from SRAM (main control panel) to others, press [MainCopy.] To copy the counter data from CF memory card (network board) to others, press [OB Copy.] To copy the counter data from FRAM (panel board) to others, press [Panel Copy.]

3.39 Asset Number

This mode is used to input the asset number. You can also input the asset number from the web screen. (See page 3-156.) 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <5>. 2. Input asset number, and press [Enter].

3-139

3.40 Quick Initial settings

At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures. You can do the following setting with continuously. 1. Initial settings 2. Consumable order sheet settings 1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <9>.

See following pages, how to set-up each mode: Initial setting : See Scanner and Fax Guide. Consumable order sheet : See 3.17 Consumable order sheet on page 3-109.

3.41 Update the software

There are three choices to update the ROM: Using the USB memory Using the Network (operating through control panel) Using the Network (operating through web browser) (See page 3-154.)

There are three types of flash ROM to update: Main ROM Network ROM PCL ROM In following cases, software cannot be updated. Check the machine in advance: The machine is in operation (scanning, printing, or sending fax etc.) The memory is in use by delayed transmission or for other reasons.

CAUTION
Do not turn the power off while updating the software. Doing so may damage the main control board.

3.41.1 Updating the software using an USB memory

Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared in an USB memory. You can either update it automatically to the latest version : Auto Update, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version manually : Manual Update.

3-140

Auto Update
To update the ROM automatically, create a Boot folder to the root directory of USB memory, and save the data there under folders with names under the following rules:

USB flash memory Boot

Machine

2590USA 2590USA_Ver.txt 2590_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin

Panel

2590PUSA 2590PUSA_Ver.txt 2590P_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin OB750 OB750_Ver.txt OB750_xxxxxx.zip FWUD.bin

Network

PCL

OP700EN OP700EN_Ver.txt OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin

xxxxxx indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0 2590 indicates machine name. Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name. he text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :USA, then an _(underT score) and Ver. An example for machine ROM text file: 2590USA_Ver.txt he firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an _(underscore), then the country T code :USA, an _(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string update following an _(underscore). An example for machine firmware : 2590_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin Following are the firmware types and their names: Firmware type Name Machine ROM 2590 Panel ROM 2590P Network (OfficeBridge) OB750 PCL OP700 Use the same ROM version for the machine and panel.

NOTE
The ROM versions are not selected automatically. Save only the file to which you want to update the machine (or network, PCL).

3-141

1 Turn off the machine. 2 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored. 3 Turn the machine on to start update. 4 When the display shows Firmware Updating OK, turn the machine OFF and ON. 5 Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.

Manual update
Updating the ROM manually either by selecting the latest ROM version or by selecting the desired version. Two or more ROM data can be saved on an USB memory.

USB flash memory Boot 2590USA

Machine

2590USA 2590USA_Ver.txt 2590_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin

Panel

2590PUSA 2590PUSA_Ver.txt 2590P_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin

Network

OB750 OB750_Ver.txt OB750_xxxxxx.zip FWUD.bin

PCL

OP700EN OP700EN_Ver.txt OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin

See "Auto Update" for the saving and naming rules of folders and data.

3-142

1 Connect the USB memory in which the firmware is stored. 2 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8> 3 Press [Update from the USB].

4 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].

5 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter]. When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM type will be highlighted.

When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.

6 7 8 9

Press [Update]. Press [Yes] and the updating starts. When the display shows Firmware Updating OK, turn the machine OFF and ON. Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.

3-143

3.41.2 Updating the software using the network

Update the machine software using an ROM data prepared on a network location. You can either update it automatically to the latest version, or to the desired version by selecting the ROM version manually. Store the ROM data on a network location in advance.

a network folder

Machine

2590USA 2590USA_Ver.txt 2590_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin

Panel

2590PUSA 2590PUSA_Ver.txt 2590P_USA_xxxxxx_update.bin

Newtwork

OB750 OB750_Ver.txt OB750_xxxxxx.zip FWUD.bin

PCL

OP700EN OP700EN_Ver.txt OP700_EN_xxxxxx.bin

xxxxxx indicates the ROM version. For example : A0A0A0 2590 indicates machine name. Save a text file with the latest version name and the firmware under the folder with the firmware type name. he text file should have a name with the firmware type followed by country code :USA, then an _(underT score) and Ver. An example for machine ROM text file: 2590USA_Ver.txt he firmware should have a name with the firmware type followed by an _(underscore), then the country T code :USA, an _(underscore), and the ROM version. Machine ROM should also have the string update following an _(underscore). An example for machine firmware : 2590_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin Following are the firmware types and their names: Firmware type Name Machine ROM 2590 Panel ROM 2590P Network (OfficeBridge) OB750 PCL OP700 Use the same ROM version for the machine and panel.

3-144

1 Press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8> 2 Press [Update from the network]. 3 Press [Specifying Server]. This step is needed only at the first time. When once the setting is registered, skip to step 5. 4 Enter the Protocol, Path, Account, Password, Proxy Server, and Proxy Port, and press [Close].

5 Press either [Update to the latest version] or [Specify with specified version].

6 Select the ROM type and ROM version to update, and press [Enter]. When [Update to the latest version] is pressed, select the ROM type to update. The selected ROM type will be highlighted. When [Specify with specified version] is pressed, select the ROM type and enter the ROM version.

7 Press [Update]. 8 Press [Yes] and the updating starts. 9 When updating is finished, turn the machine OFF and ON. 10 Press <My MFP> and check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded.

NOTE
The setting you entered at step 4 will only be saved when you continue the updating steps until step 8. When you cancel the steps, the setting will not be saved.

3-145

3.41.3 About error

If an error occurred during updating, a five-digit error code will be displayed. The first digit indicates the ROM type, the rest indicates the cause of the error.

ROM type
Code 1 2 3 4 0 ROM type Main Panel Network PCL Could not specify

Error cause
Code 1000 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1200 1400 1500 2030 Cause / Countermeasure General error. Start error detected. Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file. USB memory read error. Check the USB memory is working correctly. Network board read error. Check the network boar is working correctly. File read error. Check that the ROM file are stored correctly. The machine is in use. Update when the machine and the memory are free. Could not find the ROM file. Check the specified file. The ROM version for the machine and panel are different. Unable to update. Check the main control board is working correctly.

Start error (1020)

The datailed errror code will be displayed when you press <Setting>, <*>, <9>, <8>. The four-digit numbers in the parenthesis is the detailed errors for start error.

Third digite error code Code Cause / Countermeasure 0020 Fax is in use. (Reserved communications are existing.) 0080 Memory is in use. 00A0 Fax and memory are in use. Last digite error code Code Cause / Countermeasure 0000 No information 0001 Machine is operating. 0002 Machine is printing. 0003 Machine is operating and printing. 0004 Machine is scanning. 0005 Machine is printing and scanning. 0006 Machine is operating and scanning. 3-146

0007 0008 0009 000A 000B 000C 000D 000E 000F

Machine is operating, printing, and scanning. Machine is communicating. Machine is operating and communicating. Machine is printing and communicating. Machine is operating, printing, and communicating. Machine is scanning and communicating. Machine is operating, scanning and communicating. Machine is printing, scanning and communicating. Machine is operating, printing, scanning and communicating.

For example When the display shows 1020(008A), the update did not start because the memory is in use, and the machine was printing and communicating.

3.41.4 The indication while updating

While the software is being updated, you can be checked the status through LED lamps on the panel.

Updating Status
Lighting LED 1 <Login> 2 <Basic / Advanced View> 3 <Job Confirm.> Status Initializing step ROM data acquisition step Updating step

Updating ROM type

Lighting LED 4 <Copy> 5 <Scan> 6 <Fax> 7 <Print> ROM type Main ROM Network PCL Panel

Result
Lighting LED 8 Information lamp ROM type Green : Update has succeeded Red : Update failed

Scan

Basic / Advanced View

Print

3-147

3.42 Network service functions

The following topics will be covered in this section: Starting the service functions Downloading image data Internet FAX detailed status Dial option conversion settings Firmware Update via network Firmware Update Print Data Capture Network Capture Modifying the session control time Input Asset Number Storage replacement operation

To open the network service screen,

1. Start the web browser on computer. 2. Type the machines IP address in the URL address field followed by /service. e.g. http://192.168.1.10/service 3. Enter login ID and password. ID : muratec Password : service 4. Now the network service settings are available.

3-148

3.42.1 Downloading image data

You can download the image data stored on the network board using this function. The data is downloaded in .zip format. 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Retrieve Documents]. 3. The folders will be displayed. Click the folder which contains your desired image data.

4. Follow the instructions on the screen and download the image data.

3-149

3.42.2 Internet FAX detailed status

1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [IFAX Setailed status].

Items Tx Minimum Wait Retry Setting

Insert X-CIAJWNETFAX header

X-Mailer MDN Expired Time

Tx E-Mail MIME char setting

Possible reception size

Instructions Set the transmission interval for internet fax with location specified by IP address. # of Retry : Set the number of times to retry sending the internet fax when a memory overflow occurred or a socket error occurred. Retry interval : et the retry interval sending the internet fax when S a memory overflow occurred or a socket error occurred. To add a X-CIAJWNETFAX header always, set this function to On. This header is usually added only to IFAX that default body and message are edited, so that the other machine will not print the message. When this function is On, the body and message will not be printed on the partner's IFAX machine even if the user has edited them. (Other companies IFAX may print them.) To add X-Mailer information (mailer name), enter it here. Set the time which after that the MDN will be printed respectively. The available time is from 0 to 72 hours. When MDN is demanded in IFAX transmission for several addresses, MDN, which will be received within this set up time, will be printed together in one list. If the time is set up to 0, MDN will be printed every time when it is received. Select which code to use when transmitting characters other than ASCII code. Select LATIN9 (ISO-8859-15) only when the user wants to use this code. When only ASCII code is used, the message is transmitted with US-ASCII regardless of this setup. See the codes on the next page. Specify the maximum data size for Scan-to-xx. The available range is from 20-40 MB. Only even numbers are available. The total size is shared with Internet fax: that means when large size is specified for Scan-to-xx, internet fax has small size available. This memory is separated from the machine image memory and is on the network board.

3-150

3-151

3-152

3.42.3 Convert dialling characters in e-mail gateway functions

The following dialling characters will be converted to certain characters specified here: Pause (/P) Tone (/T) Flash (/F) For example, when you enter &A for /P (pause) and specify a fax number like 123/P456, the number will be converted to 123&A456 and transmitted at e-mail gateway transmission. 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Dial Option Conversion]. 3. Enter the characters to which the machine should convert the dialling character.

4. Click [Save].

NOTE
The Flash character (/F) is not available for USA. Up to two characters are able to enter for each dialling character. For available characters, see table below. If the box is blank, the dialling characters will be overridden when transmitting over the e-mail gateway.

3-153

3.42.4 Firmware Update Via Network

To update the machine via network, set the items. 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Firmware Update via Network Server]. 3. Enter the necessary information. 4. Click [Update] to start update.

5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself. 6. Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at Machine Status on the OfficeBridge.

3.42.5 Firmware Update

NOTE
This updating procedure required enough free space on CF memory card. If there is no free space on CF memory card, this way of update is unavailable. 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Firmware Update]. 3. Click [Browse] to browse the location where the firmware file is located.

eg. Machine: 2590_USA_A0A0A0_update.bin Network: OB750_A0A0A0.zip PCL: OP700_EN_A0A0A0.bin 4. Click [Update]. 5. When updating is finished, the machine reboots from itself. 6.Check the ROM version to see the update has succeeded. The ROM version is displayed at Machine Status on the OfficeBridge.

3-154

3.42.6 Print data capture

User can capture and store the PCL Print Commands as a .PRN File in CF card on Network Board. This feature supports concurrent processing to print PCL print data and capture PCL commands. This feature works with PCL Network Print via LPR, Port 9100 and IPP. 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Print Data Capture]. 3. Enter the necessary information.

4. 5. 6.

Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data. Click [Capture Stop] to stop capturing. Capturing also stops when the window is closed or the machine is turned off. Click HTTP Download, follow the instruction displayed, and download the captured file.

7. Click [File Delete] to delete the file from the CF card.

3.42.7 Network capture

For details of this future, refer to 3.32 Network capture (Packet capture). 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Network Capture]. 3. Enter the necessary information. Refer to 3.32.3 Setting details if needed.

4. Click [Capture Start] to start capturing the data. 5. Click [File Tx] to send the captured the data to the specified location.

3-155

3.42.8 Modifying the session control time

Modify the session time between the machine and the OfficeBridge users here. The factory default is 30 minutes. When there is no communication between the machine and the OfficeBridge user during this time, the user will forcibly be log out. The time can be set between 10 to 1440 minutes (24 hours). 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Session Control time]. 3. Input the desired value and click [Save].

3.42.9 Asset Number

This mode is used to input the asset number. You can also input the asset number from the machine control panel. (See page 3-139.) 1. Open the network service screen. (See page 3-148.) 2. Click [Machine Settings]. 3. Input the asset number and click [Save].

3-156

3.43 Quick TWAIN Settings

3.43.1 About Quick TWAIN
Quick TWAIN enables you to scan documents to a PC application with easy operation that has eliminated the steps to save the scanned data into a TWAIN box. It has achieved an operational feeling like using the real times scan by deleting the scanned data automatically from the machine. It does not require PC applications to open the TWAIN driver screen. This operation can be set on the PC application. When you enable this setting, ready screen for scanner will be switched to the following:

3.43.2 Customizing Quick TWAIN

Edit the following file to customize your Quick TWAIN: \Windows\TWAIN_32\251f\mkuetwu.msf configuration file for USB cable connection \Windows\TWAIN_32\251f\mkuetwn.msf configuration file for network connection The following three points are customizable: 1. Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not 2. Whether to disable TWAIN application operation 3. Import image on application resolution 4. Specify the resolution of the image to import 1) Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not This switch specify the UI screen on your computer. Quick= 0: OFF / Always show TWAIN driver UI. 1: ON / Shows TWAIN driver UI according to the UI setting of the application side. (Default) 2) Whether to disable TWAIN application operation This switch disables TWAIN driver UI regardless of the UI setting of the application side. Auto= 0: FF / Shows TWAIN driver UI according to Quick : Whether to show TWAIN driver UI or not. O (Default) 1: ON / Never shows TWAIN driver UI. 3) Import image on application resolution This switch enables the application to control the scanning resolution. When you set this switch to 1, the image will be converted and imported at a resolution specified by the application software. AppRes= 0: OFF (Default), 1: ON / Convert 4) Specify the resolution of the image to import This is the resolution setting for the scanned document. When you set this switch to 1, the image will be imported at the resolution specified in advance. This setting has a higher priority to setting AppRes : 3) Import image on application resolution. FixRes = 0: Resolution depends on the request from the application. (Default) 1: Specify resolution (200/300/400/600 dpi) regardless of the resolution of scanned document.

3-157

4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting flow chart
Check the detail of the trouble.

Is the user operating the machine correctly?

No

Does the problem still occurs with correct operation? Yes

Is the problem solved by "Initial checks" operation? See page 4-2.

Solve the problem according to the following menu. Checkout error C o m m u n i c a - Image failure tion error See page : 4-3 See page : 4-7 See page : 4-25 D o c u m e n t Recording jam Machine maltrouble trouble function See page : 4-43 See page : 4-46 See page : 4-47

4-1

4.2 Initial checks

Check all items: Machine Remedy Turn the power on. Close all covers correctly. Set the recording paper. Set the toner and drum correctly. Advice customers to use recommended toner otherwise image failure may occur easily. Do customers use paper conform to the spec- Advice customers to use suitable ification designed for use in the machine? paper otherwise image failure or paper jam may occur easily. Does folded or wrinkled paper set in the pa- Reload new paper. per cassette? Is the paper set correctly? Refer the user's guide to set the paper correctly. If paper size dial adjustment or other operation such as paper size registration is needed, follow the instruction. Are the inner parts such as fuser, transfer Clean the parts with paper cleaner or roller, or transfer guide dirty with paper waste etc. or toner? Are all cassette parts working smoothly? Replace the part not working smoothly. Are foreign objects on the paper path? Remove the objects. Are the feed rollers worn out? Replace the roller. Do customers use document conform to the Instruct customers to scan document specification designed for use in the maon document glass when the document chine? is not suitable for ADF. Using unsuitable document on ADF may cause document skew, separation problem or document jam easily. Are foreign objects on scanning path? Remove the object. Is the scanner dirty? Clean the scanner as dirty scanner may cause image failure. Are the separator roller and separator pad Replace the roller or the pad worn out? Is the machine connected to a line jack with a Reconnect it. line cable? Are there advanced fax functions such as In some functions, free communication closed transmission or block junk fax set? is not possible. Is the machine connected to a network hub (or Reconnect it. printer) with LAN cable (or USB cable)? Is the print driver or TWAIN driver installed Reinstall the driver following the user's correctly? guide. If the machine is on network, is the network Refer to the user's guide and set up setting correct? the network setting. When the machine is turned on in a warm Wipe the parts with dry soft cloths, or place while the machine is cool (in winter, es- wait for ten to twenty minutes after pecially at machine installation), condensation power on. occurs inside the printer that causes various Instruct customers to open toner or problem. drum bag after it becomes to room Trouble examples: temperature. ow image density or uneven density due to L recording part condensation. mage trouble due to toner moisture absorpI tion lur image due to condensation on drum B surface. aper discharge problem due to condensaP tion in paper supply path. 4-2 Check items Is the power on? Are the covers closed correctly? Is the recording paper set? Are the toner and drum set correctly? Is the recommended toner used?

Toner

Paper

Paper path

Scanning area / Document

Communication

Printer environment

Others

4.3 Checkout error

4.3.1 Checking the error message
When Checkout error message is displayed, follow the steps below to check the service call number.

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <6>. 2. Press [Service Call]. 3. Check the service error code on the display.

4-3

4.3.2 Error code

Code 08: 0B: 18: 1E: 47: 50: Error Message RX Motor Error Fan Error Fuser Error Drum Cartridge Fuse Error Developer Cartridge Fuse Error Shift Sensor Error

08: RX Motor Error

Causes:

The machine checks the motor error signal in one second the motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for continuous 300ms, this message will be displayed.
Suggested corrective action:

1. Check the connection between RX motor and main control board. 2. Verify the RX motor rotates when the power is on. If OK, see step 5. 3. Check that power is supplied to the Rx motor. If it does not, see step 5. 4. Replace the RX motor if it doesnt rotate. 5. If the problem is not solved, replace the main control board.

0B: Fan Error

Causes: The machine checks the fan error signal for three seconds in one second after the motor starts driving. When the error signal is detected for continuous 400ms, this message will be displayed.
Suggested corrective action:

1. Verify the inside fan rotates when the power is on. 2. Check the connection between the fan and Connect A PCB(P87), Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. 3. Replace the fan motor if it doesnt rotate. 4. Replace the Connect A PCB. 5. Replace the main control board.

18: Fuser Error

Causes: (The number indicates the detailed error code) 0 he fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 50 seconds after printing started. T 1 The fuser did not become to the paper pick-up temperature in 50 seconds after printing started. 2 he fuser did not become to the main motor driving temperature in 30 seconds after warming up T started. 3 he fuser did not become to the warm-up finishing temperature in 30 seconds after the motor startT ed driving. 4 A temperature of 250C or higher is detected in a mode other than sleep mode. 5 The fuser does not warm after fuser error is solved and the power is turned OFF/ON. 6 A low temperature of 10C is detected in 10 seconds after printing started. 7 A temperature of 190C is detected in ready mode after printing finished.
Suggested corrective action:

1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up. If it does not, see step 4. 2. Check the contact between Fusing thermistor and Connect A PCB(P89). 3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. 4. Replace the Fuser. 5. After replacing the Fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is on. 6. Replace the main control PCB.

4-4

1E: Drum Cartridge Fuse Error

Causes: The machine could not blow the fuse.
Suggested corrective action:

1. Verify the drum cartridge is set correctly. 2. Check the point of contacts between drum cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86). 3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. 4. Replace the drum cartridge. 5. Replace the Connect A PCB. 6. Replace the main control PCB.

47: Developer Cartridge Fuse Error

Causes: The machine could not blow the fuse.
Suggested corrective action:

1. Verify the toner cartridge is set correctly. 2. Check the point of contacts between toner cartridge and Connect A PCB (P86). 3. Check the contact between Connect A PCB (P80C) and the main board. 4. Replace the toner cartridge. 5. Replace the Connect A PCB. 6. Replace the main control PCB.

50: Shift Sensor Error

Causes: (The number indicates the detailed error code). 0 he shift sensor does not switch on at warm-up or after 40ms has passed since the shifter has T returned to its position. 1 he shift sensor does not switch off after 40ms has passed since the shifter has moved to its shift T position. Suggested corrective action: 1. Verify that the sensor is working. 2. Check the connection between the sensor and the main LPH board.

4-5

4.3.3 Network system errors

In case OB sytem error occurs, refer to the table below to address them.

1. Update the ROM using the USB memory automatically. 2. Replace the storage (HDD/CF card). 3. eplace the network R board. 5XX Version This error occurs when an optional When the machine 1. Update the mismatching CF memory card is attached to the is powered on. ROM using the error network board, and the firmware USB memory version on the CF memory card and automatically. network board do not match. 2. Replace the storage (HDD/CF card). 1XXYY* System error This error occurs with firmware or When the machine 1. Update the hardware defect. is powered on. ROM using the Firmware defect will be recovered by USB memory updating it, but hardware defect needs automatically. its replacement. 2. eplace the network R board. 3. Replace the main control board. 2XXYY* Setting data Occurs mainly when the data stored When the machine 1. Update the initialize error on the CF memory card is corrupted. is powered on ROM using the You may recover it by updating the USB memory firmware, if that does not work, clear automatically. the data. 2. Perform All RAM Clear. 3. Replace the storage (HDD/CF card). 4. eplace the network R board. * : XX and YY are function returned values.

Error Trouble Trouble detail Detection timing code 300 Eternal reboot is The firmware detected an incorrect The machine detected. status, and machine rebooted to reboots while recover them automatically. When rebooting at the this status is detected twice, this error same timing. occurs. You may better the auto-recover process by updating the firmware. The detail will be printed on the service report with developer's code. 400 System data This error occurs with firmware or When the machine clearing error hardware defect. is powered on. This error occurs when the machine reboots from User data clear or All RAM clear, and an incorrect status is detected.

Countermeasure 1. Update the ROM using the USB memory automatically. 2. Replace the storage (HDD/CF card).

4-6

4.4 Communication tourble

4.4.1 Fax communication error
The error code are printed on T.30 monitor.
Phase Tx Phase A Error code D.0.1 D.0.2 D.0.3 D.0.7 D.0.8 T.1.1 Detail Error code 0001 0002 0003 0007 0008 1011 Description Local busy detection. Busy Tone detected Canceled transmission while dialing Receiver does not answer Can not detect dial tone T1 time-out error Journal No Redial Yes No Yes Yes Message The sending was stopped. Please try again. The line was busy. Please try again. Fax job was cancelled by user. Check condition of remote fax. No dial tone detection. Check line connection. Confirm the remote fax. Note

Occurs at broadcast with TCR.

Tx Phase B

T.2.1 T.2.2

1021 1022 1100 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 110A 110B 110C 110D

Can not detect CFR or FTT Compatibility error Password transmission failed Cannot obtain password at password transmission from receiving party The obtained password from receiver at password transmission is blank The receiver is a product of other maker at closed communication The receiver has no pass code field at closed transmission The pass code did not match at closed transmission No document stored for polling The pass code did not match at pass code polling The receiver is a product of other maker at pass code polling Cannot adjust communication data rate Cannot adjust the communication mode (Normal, fine, super fine) Cannot receive standard frame DIS T4 bit did not turn ON DIS or DTC that FIF is 00 00 00 has been received. DTS requires hang up. German models only.

Only when one or more pages are received No Confirm the remote fax. Confirm the remote fax. ID check Tx error. ID was not matched. ID check Tx error. No fax number stored in remote fax.

Close Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible. Close Tx error. No pass -code stored in remote fax. Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched. Polling Tx error. No document for polling is stored in memory. Close Tx error. Passcode unmatched. Close polling Tx error. Remote fax is not compatible. Confirm the remote fax. Normally, this error does not occur. This error occurs at manual reception.

Confirm the remote fax. Confirm the remote fax.

Normally, this error does not occur.

4-7

Phase Tx Phase B

Error code T.2.2

Detail Error code 110E 110F 1110 1111 1112

Description

Journal

Redial No

Message F-Code Tx Error. No F-Code information in the remote machine. F-Code Tx Error. The Box does not exist in the remote machine. F-Code Tx Error. No document for polling is stored in FCode box. Check condition of remote fax. F-Code Polling error. Cannot access the F-Code box.

Note

1113 1114 1115 1116 T.2.3 T.3.1 1023 1031

The receiver has no box with matching Yes sub-address The receiver has no box that matches with the sender No document stored at polling in the designated box The receiver tried to poll document in a security box Polling rejected while receiving document on another line at multi line reception Polling rejected while storing or clearing documents Polling rejected while printing documents Cannot fast remote diagnose Trouble report was sent, but the receiver was not a diagnose host FTT returned at 2400 bps Document feeding error Yes Document length was over 1m Lamp error Scanner cover open error Cannot receive MCF/RTN/RTP/PIP/PIN Yes RTN was received No response to RR No response to CTC EOR output V8 process did not finished normally Yes Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode (TX FAX) Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode (RX FAX) Cannot adjust modulation Cannot finish line probing normally No Cannot finish equalizer training normally Operator canceled the transmission Yes

This error occurs at manual reception.

No High-speed RDS. Cannot send a data. Cannot send a trouble report. Remote machine is not RDS host. Cannot receive with minimum speed. Scanning error. Please send again.

This error occurs at manual reception.

Tx Phase C

No

Tx Phase D

T.4.1

1041 1042 1051 1052 1053 1081 1800 1801 1802 1803 108A 108B 1014

T.4.2 T.5.1 T.5.2 T.5.3 Tx V34 start up T.8.1

Only at Confirm the remote fax. memory Tx No The remote machine could not receive document. No Confirm the remote fax. No Cannot receive with minimum speed. No Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.

T.8.10 T.8.11 Transmission canceled T.1.4

Yes

No

Fax job was cancelled by user.

4-8

Phase Rx Phase B

Error code R.1.1

Detail Error code 2011

Description T1 time-out error

Journal

Redial Confirm the remote fax.

Message

Note Occurs at manual reception.

R.1.2

2012 2100 2101 2102 2103 2104 2105 2106 2107 2108 2109 210A 210B 210C 210D 210E 210F 2110 2111 2112 2113 2114 2115

Compatibility error The receiver is a product of other maker at closed communication No pass code received at closed communication The receiver has no pass code field at closed communication Reception blocked because of junk fax blocking function Cannot receive sender's ID at junk fax blocking function Sender's ID is blank at junk fax blocking function Sender has no polling document stored Cannot adjust communication data rate Cannot adjust communication code (MH, MR, MMR) Cannot adjust communication code (Normal, fine, super fine) Cannot adjust ECM mode Cannot adjust document width Cannot adjust minimum communication time Cannot adjust document length Cannot receive standard frame Out-of -paper reception buffer error Cannot receive error report at F-code relay reception because wrong TSI Cannot receive document because sender has not polling ability Cannot receive F-code document because of wrong sub address The receiver has no box that matches with the sender Document was sent to a reception protected box Reception rejected while receiving document to that box on another line at multi line reception

No No, if no page is received at auto reception Yes No

Confirm the remote fax. Closed Tx Err. Remote fax is not compatible. Close Rx error. No passcode stored in remote fax. Close Rx error. Passcode unmatched. Reject. Reception was rejected by the block junk fax function.

Polling Rx error. No document for polling is stored in remote fax. Confirm the remote fax.

Normally, this error does not occur.

Confirm the remote fax. Out of paper reception is full. The F-Code RelayReception cannot be performed if fax number is not stored. F-Code Polling error. Remote machine does not have FCode polling function. Confirm the remote fax. F-Code Tx Err. The box does not exist in the machine. F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code is set as the ban on reception. F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box.

4-9

Phase Rx Phase B

Error code R.1.2

Detail Error code 2116 2117 2118 2119 211A 211B 2023 2031 2033 2034 2036 2044 2041 2042 2051 2052 2081 2800 2801 2802 2803

Description

Journal

Redial No

Message F-Code Rx Err. The F-Code box is full. F-Code Rx Err. Cannot access the F-Code box

Note

Rx Phase C

R.2.3 R.3.1 R.3.3 R.3.4 R.3.6 R.4.4 R.4.1 R.4.2 R.5.1

The F-code box stores document to its Yes maximum capacity Reception rejected while storing or clearing documents Reception rejected while printing documents Cannot delete document for overwrite at overwrite mode Cannot update Flash ROM through communication Cannot fast remote diagnose No answer to FTT No answer to CFR Yes DCN received Hang up Continuous error line detected DCN received to TT FRTN output Memory overflow Too long document received Cannot receive MPS/EOM/EOP Cannot receive RR DNC received Error occurred while ECM data mode V8 process did not finished normally Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode (TX FAX) Primary channel instruction did not match at V8 mode (RX FAX) Cannot adjust modulation Cannot finish line probing normally Cannot finish equalizer training normally

Machine error. Reception was stopped. No High-speed RDS. Cannot receive data. Confirm the remote fax. Confirm the remote fax. Reception was stopped. Cannot receive with minimum speed. Some pages are not received correctly. Memory over. Received doc. is not able to receive. Confirm the remote fax.

Normally, this error does not occur.

No

Document over 3m

Rx Phase D

Yes

No

R.5.2 Rx V34 start up R.8.1

Yes

No

Cannot send a fax in SuperG3 mode.

R.8.10

208A

No

R.8.11

208B

Yes at polling reception Yes at polling reception

4-10

4.4.2 Network communication error

Scan to E-mail / Internet FAX transmission results
Error code Display Message 1000 Transmission OK complete 995 Transmission Not able to transmit. error Mail server is not found. 988 Not able to transmit. Please confirm setting. 987 990 997 989 Not able to transmit. Please confirm e-mail address. 993 Not able to transmit. Please transmit a message once 992 again. 991 999 996 986 984 985 980 994 Not a reply from e-mail server. 1002 Transmission Not able to transmit. canceled Stopped. Description Transmission completed. DNS server name resolution failed. Countermeasure Check the DNS setting.

Authentication method in SMTP is dif- Check the SMTP/POP setting is correct. ferent. User authentication failed. MAIL command in SMTP failed. Main setting is not correct. RCPT command in SMTP failed. Check the e-mail address set as destination is correct. Socket error. Response time out error. SMTP command failed. Memory error. Transmission job parameter error. File generating error. Code converter error. File not existing. Unknown error. Connection error. Stop error. Try transmission again. Check the network connections.

4-11

Internet FAX reception result

Error code Descrpition 1 2 The MFP is not compatible with the e-mail attached image. 3 The MFP refused to forward the received e-mail. Cannot access to POP3 server. No response from POP3 server. POP3 server authentication failed. Countermeasure Ask the sender to send an internet fax in a compatible file format. o respond to the forward request, set Response to Fax Forwarding Request in E-mail Settings > Optional T E-mail Settings. heck E-mail address or domain name that will accept forwarded transmission at Response to Fax ForwardC ing Request in E-mail Settings > Optional E-mail Settings. Check that POP3 Server Address, POP3 Port Number, SSL, and POP3S Port Number is set correctly in E-mail Settings > SMTP/POP Settings. Check the DNS server address in TCP/IP setting. Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings > SMTP/POP Settings: POP3 server address, POP 3 port number, SSL usage, and POP 3 S port number. Check the following items are set correct in E-mail Settings > SMTP/POP Settings: Authentication method, POP3 user name, and POP 3 user password.

4 5

Result of the reception error Code Display and history 1 (No message) 2 Fax forwarding 3 Print 4 Error E-mail (MDN) 5 Error E-mail (Forwarding) 6 Error E-mail (Reply) 7 Error E-mail (Notice) 8 Error E-mail (Size over) 9 Erase

Check message

Description The mail was received, and processed successfully. FAX forwarded. Printed (MDN or DSN). An error occurred, and replied to the MDN. An error occurred, and e-mail is forwarded. An error occurred, and an e-mail is replied An error occurred, and an notification is sent. An error occurred, and oversize notification is sent. The e-mail was deleted.

4-12

Scan to folder, Scan to Printer transmission result

Error Code 10000 9999 9000 9994 9993 Description Check message Detail Error occurred of temporary system shortage. Wait for a while, and try to send again. Countermeasure Internal erDescription ror Success Success SMB error Internal error This error does not occur at scan to folder. It occurs at browsing a file using touch panel or WEB browser.

Transmission completed OK successfully System error System error occurred.

Domain was not found.

9989

3 18

omain was not found. D (This error does not apComputer was not found pear on check message and communication history) omputer was not found. C (This error does not appear on check message and communication history) Size of a file to acquire Size of a file to acquire exceeded size at the exceeded size at the maximaximum. mum. Connection error Not able to be connect.

his error occurres when Check that host name on the T a same host name is on network. the network. Check that host name on the his error occurres when network. T a same work group name is on the network.

The attached file size ex- Check the file size of the atceeds the limitation. tached file. his error occurs when a heck that host name on T C same work group name the network. is on the network. heck DNS server adC ame resolution failed N dress, DNS suffix, and WINS server address are set correct at "TCP/IP settings". heck that the destination C computer name is registered on DNS server. heck that the destination C computer registers WINS setting correctly. Parameter Invalid parameter error Error Data retrieval error retrieving data Invalid Invalid open mode open mode Server Server does not support doesn't MAC signing support MAC signing MAC sig- MAC signature in incoming nature in packet was broken incoming packet was broken

19 20

21

4-13

Error Code 22

Description Connection error

Check message Not able to be connect.

23

24 25 26

Internal erDescription ror his error occurs when a heck that host name on database T C Database object already exsame work group name the network. object alists and cannot be created is on the network. heck DNS server adC ready exists ame resolution failed N dress, DNS suffix, and and cannot WINS server address are be created set correct at "TCP/IP set- mount failed CIFS Client mount failed to for a reason tings". connect to remote server heck that the destination other then C authentication computer name is regisunable to dis- unable to dispose resources tered on DNS server. heck that the destination pose resourcC computer registers WINS es invalid handle invalid handle passed setting correctly. Detail Countermeasure
passed SPNEGO negotiation did not find a match path should be resolved over DFS DFS cache overflow SMB_ ERRbadfunc

SPNEGO negotiation did not find a match path should be resolved over DFS DFS cache overflow Invalid function. The server did not recognize or could not perform a system call generated by the server, e.g. set the DIRECTORY attribute on a data file, invalid seek mode. Memory control blocks destroyed Insufficient server memory to perform the requested function Invalid memory block address

27 28 1001

1007 1008

SMB_ ERRbadmcb SMB_ ERRnomem SMB_ ERRbadmem

1009

4-14

Error Code 1010 1011 1003

Description Connection error

Check message Not able to be connect.

Detail

Countermeasure

Internal error
SMB_ ERRbadenv SMB_ RRbadformat SMB_ ERRbadpath SMB_ ERRbaddata SMB_ ERRbaddrive SMB_ ERRremcd SMB_ ERRdiffdevice SMB_ ERRbadshare SMB_ERRlock

Description Invalid environment Invalid format Directory invalid. A directory component in a pathname could not be found. Invalid data (generated only by IOCTL calls within the server) Invalid drive specified A Delete Directory request attempted remove the server's current directory Not the same device (e.g. a cross volume rename was attempted) The sharing mode specified for Open conflicts with existing FIDs on the file. A Lock request conflicted with an existing lock or specified an invalid mode, or an Unlock requested attempted to remove a lock held by another process. The specified device type conflicts with the actual device type on the remote resource. The file named in the request already exists. Invalid directory name in a path.

1013

1015 1016

his error occurs when a heck that host name on T C same work group name the network. is on the network. heck DNS server adC ame resolution failed N dress, DNS suffix, and WINS server address are set correct at "TCP/IP settings". heck that the destination C computer name is registered on DNS server. heck that the destination C computer registers WINS setting correctly.

1017

1032

1033

1066

SMB_ ERRdontsupportipc SMB_ ERRfilexists SMB_ ERRbaddirectory

1080 1087

4-15

Error Code 1122

Description Connection error

Check message Not able to be connect.

Detail

Countermeasure

Internal error
SMB_ ERRinsufficientbuffer SMB_ ERRinvalidname SMB_ ERRalreadyexists SMB_ ERRbadpipe SMB_ ERRpipebusy SMB_ ERRpipeclosing SMB_ ERRnotconnected SMB_ ERRmoredata SMB_ ERRerror

Description "The buffer is too small to contain the entry. No information has been written to the buffer." Invalid name. Object already exists. Returned on attempt to create file or directory which already exists on the server. Pipe invalid All instances of the requested pipe are busy. Pipe close in progress. No process on other end of pipe. There is more date to be returned. Non-specific error code, returned under the following conditions: resource other than disk space exhausted (e.g. TIDs), first SMB command was not negotiate, multiple negotiates attempted, and internal server error.

1123 1183

1230 1231 1232 1233 1234 2001

his error occurs when a heck that host name on T C same work group name the network. is on the network. heck DNS server adC ame resolution failed N dress, DNS suffix, and WINS server address are set correct at "TCP/IP settings". heck that the destination C computer name is registered on DNS server. heck that the destination C computer registers WINS setting correctly.

4-16

Error Code 1002

Description

Check message

Detail

Countermeasure Check that the destination shared folder is not read/ write protected.

Internal error
SMB_ ERRbadfile SMB_ ERRnofids SMB_ ERRbadfid SMB_ ERRusempx SMB_ ERRusestd SMB_ ERRcontmpx SMB_ ERRnosupport SMB_ ERRnowrite SMB_ ERRbadunit SMB_ ERRnotready SMB_ ERRbadcmd SMB_ ERRdata SMB_ ERRbadreq SMB_ ERRseek SMB_ ERRbadmedia

Description File not found. The last component of file's pathname could not be found. Too many open files. The server has file handles available. Invalid file handle. The file handle specified was not recognized by the server. Temporarily unable to support Raw, use MPX mode Temporarily unable to support Raw, use standard read/ write Continue in MPX mode Function not supported Attempt to write on writeprotected media Unknown unit Drive not ready Unknown command Data error (CRC) Bad request structure length Seek error Unknown media type

1004

File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when ing and writing. the destination shared folder is read/write protected.

1006

2250 2251

2252 2999 3019 3020 3021 3022 3023 3024 3025 3026

4-17

Error Code 3027 3028 3029 3030 3031 3034 3035 3036 3039 4000 1005

Description

Check message

Detail

Countermeasure Check that the destination shared folder is not read/ write protected.

Internal error
SMB_ ERRbadsector SMB_ ERRnopaper SMB_ ERRwrite SMB_ ERRread SMB_ ERRgeneral SMB_ ERRwrongdisk SMB_ ERRFCBUnavail SMB_ ERRsharebufexc SMB_ ERRdiskfull Error requesting file size

Description Sector not found Printer out of paper Write fault Read fault General failure The wrong disk was found in a drive No FCBs are available to process request A sharing buffer has been exceeded The disk is full Error requesting file attributes Access denied, the client's context does not permit the requested function. This includes the following conditions: invalid rename command, write to Fid open for read only, read on Fid open for write only, attempt to delete a non-empty directory. Invalid open mode

File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when ing and writing. the destination shared folder is read/write protected.

Login error

Not able to log in.

Cannot login with the entered user name and password.

SMB_ heck that the entered C user name and password ERRnoacces are correct. heck that the entered user C name and password have authority to write.

1012

SMB_ ERRbadaccess

4-18

Error Code 2002

Description Login error

Check message Not able to log in.

Detail Cannot login with the entered user name and password.

Countermeasure

Internal error

Description Invalid password - name/ password pair in a Tree Connect or Session Setup is invalid. The client does not have the necessary access rights within the specified context for the requested function. The TID specified in a command was invalid. Invalid network name in tree connect Invalid device - printer request made to non-printer connection or non-printer request made to printer connection. Print queue full (files) -- returned by open print file Print queue full -- no space EOF on print queue dump Invalid print file FID The server did not recognize the command received. The server encountered an internal error, e.g. system file unavailable. The FID and pathname parameters contained an invalid combination of values. The access permissions specified for a file or directory are not a valid combination. The server cannot set the requested attribute.

2004

SMB_ heck that the entered C user name and password ERRbadpw are correct. heck that the entered user C name and password have SMB_ authority to write. ERRaccess

2005 2006

2007

SMB_ ERRinvtid SMB_ ERRinvnetname SMB_ ERRinvdevice

2049 2050 2051 2052 2064 2065 2067

SMB_ ERRqfull SMB_ ERRqtoobig SMB_ ERRqeof SMB_ ERRinvfid SMB_ ERRsmbcmd SMB_ ERRsrverror SMB_ ERRfilespecs SMB_ ERRbadpermits

2069

4-19

Error Code 2071 2081 2082 2083 2087

Description Login error

Check message Not able to log in.

Detail Cannot login with the entered user name and password.

Countermeasure

Internal error

Description The attribute mode in the Set File Attribute request is invalid. Server paused (reserved for messaging) Not receiving messages (reserved for messaging) No room to buffer message (reserved for messaging) Too many remote user names (reserved for messaging) Operation timed out No resources currently available for request Too many UIDs active on this session The UID is not known as a valid user identifier on this session. A File Search command can find no more files matching the specified criteria. The specified share name cannot be found on the remote server. When the Output File Format is set to XML Type A, the available characters are limited. A space cannot be entered. * or a number cannot be entered as the first character.

SMB_ heck that the entered C user name and password ERRsetattrmode are correct. heck that the entered user SMB_ C name and password have ERRpaused SMB_ authority to write. ERRmsgoff SMB_ ERRnoroom SMB_ ERRrmuns

2088 2089 2090 2091

SMB_ ERRtimeout SMB_ ERRnoresource SMB_ERR toomany-uids SMB_ ERRinvuid

1018

Cannot finde the file in the shared folder

Not a file to a shared folder.

Cannot find the specified Check that the file is in the file in the specified folder. folder. Cannot find the specified folder. An invalid character is entered in the Metadata Name field.

SMB_ ERRnofiles

1067

Cannot finde the shared Not a shared folder. folder ScanTag format error XML format error

Check that the folder is set as SMB_ ERRnos-hare a shared folder. Check the Metadata Name field and reenter it.

5000

4-20

Scan to FTP server transmission result

Error Code 10000 9999 9000 2 Description Check message Detail Countermeasure Internal error Success FTP error Internal error Very early initialization code failed. This is likely to be an internal error or problem. -> unsupported parameter to CURLOPT_FTPSSLAUTH The URL was not properly formatted. ->No filename specified for FTP upload/bad FTP String Couldn't resolve proxy. The given proxy host could not be resolved. Couldn't resolve host. The given remote host was not resolved. Failed to connect to host or proxy. Description

Transmission completed OK successfully System error System error occurred.

An error occurred because Retry later. there was a temporary system memory shortage. Name resolution failed

Connection error

Not able to be connected

heck DNS server address CURLE_ C is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FAILED_INIT tings". heck that the destination C FTP server name is regisCURLE_ tered on DNS server.
URL_ MALFORMAT

7 8

CURLE_ COULDNT_ RESOLVE_ PROXY CURLE_ COULDNT_ RESOLVE_ HOST CURLE_ COULDNT_ CONNECT CURLE_ FTP_ WEIRD_ SERVER_ REPLY

After connecting to an FTP server, libcurl expects to get a certain reply back. This error code implies that it got a strange or bad reply. The given remote server is probably not an OK FTP server. CURLE_ FTP_ a service was denied by the ACCESS_ FTP server due to lack of acDENIED cess - when login fails this is not returned.

4-21

Error Code 11

Description Connection error

Check message Not able to be connected

Detail Name resolution failed

Countermeasure

Internal error

Description After having sent the FTP password to the server, libcurl expects a proper reply. This error code indicates that an unexpected code was returned. libcurl failed to get a sensible result back from the server as a response to either a PASV or a EPSV command. The server is flawed. FTP servers return a 227line as a response to a PASV command. If libcurl fails to parse that line, this return code is passed back. An internal failure to lookup the host used for the new connection. The timeout time was reached. FTP PORT operation failed. The FTP PORT command returned error. This mostly happen when you haven't specified a good enough address for libcurl to use. The REST command failed. This should never happen if the server is sane. Couldn't resume download Aborted by callback. A callback returned "abort" to libcurl. failed sending network data

heck DNS server address CURLE_ C is set correct at "TCP/IP set- FTP_WEIRD_ PASS_REPLY tings". heck that the destination C FTP server name is registered on DNS server.
CURLE_ FTP_WEIRD_ PASV_REPLY

13

14

CURLE_FTP_ WEIRD_227_ FORMAT

15

CURLE_FTP_ CANT_GET_ HOST CURLE_ OPERATION_ TIMEOUTED CURLE_FTP_ PORT_ FAILED

28 30

31

CURLE_FTP_ COULDNT_ USE_REST CURLE_BAD_ DOWNLOAD_ RESUME CURLE_ ABORTED_ BY_ CALLBACK CURLE_ SEND_ ERROR

36 42

55

4-22

Error Code 56 63

Description Connection error

Check message Not able to be connected

Detail Name resolution failed

Countermeasure

Internal error

Description Failure in receiving network data Maximum file size exceeded

17 18

heck DNS server address CURLE_ C is set correct at "TCP/IP set- RECV_ERROR tings". heck that the destination CURLE_ C FTP server name is regis- FILESIZE_ EXCEEDED tered on DNS server. CURLE_FTP_ File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination ing and writing. the destination FTP server FTP server is not write pro- COULDNT_ SET_BINARY is write protected. tected.
CURLE_ PARTIAL_ FILE

Couldn't set desired mode A file transfer was shorter or larger than expected. This happens when the server first reports an expected transfer size, and then delivers data that doesn't match the previously given size. (result != 226 Transfer complete, result != 250 Requested file action okay, completed.) This was either a weird reply to a 'RETR' command or a zero byte transfer complete. When sending custom "QUOTE" commands to the remote server, one of the commands returned an error code that was 400 or higher (for FTP) or otherwise indicated unsuccessful completion of the command. An error occurred when writing received data to a local file, or an error was returned to libcurl from a write callback.

19

CURLE_FTP_ COULDNT_ RETR_FILE CURLE_FTP_ QUOTE_ ERROR

21

23

CURLE_ WRITE_ ERROR

4-23

Error Code 25

Description

Check message

Detail

Countermeasure

Internal error
CURLE_ UPLOAD_ FAILED

Description Failed starting the upload. For FTP, the server typically denied the STOR command. The error buffer usually contains the server's explanation to this. (This error code was formerly known as CURLE_ FTP_COULDNT_STOR_ FILE.) same as CURLE_UPLOAD_ FAILED Could open/read from file A memory allocation request failed. This is serious badness and things are severely screwed up if this ever occur. User: password or similar was not accepted and we failed to login

File read and write error Not come by the file read- Cannot send a file when Check that the destination ing and writing. the destination FTP server FTP server is not write prois write protected. tected.

25 26 27

CURLE_FTP_ COULDNT_ STOR_FILE CURLE_ READ_ ERROR CURLE_OUT_ OF_MEMORY

67

Login error

Not able to log in.

Cannot login with the entered user name and password.

Check that the entered user name and password are correct.

CURLE_ LOGIN_ DENIED

4-24

4.5 Image quality problems

Go through the following steps to solve the problem: 1. Check the machine parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves. 2. djust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Setting>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select A [Background level], and press <Start>.) Clean the document glass and document pad in advance. 3. Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (scanner section) or the output system (printer section):
1. Make copy full size copy of a document

(Original)

(Copy)

2. Make a reduction copy of the document.

(Original)

(Copy) - Input system cause : scanner

(Original)

(Copy) - Output system cause: printer

4-25

4.5.1 Typical fault images

1. Blank image 2. Black iamge 3. Low image density / rough image

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

4. Dark image density 5. Blank lines/ Blank spots 6. Void areas

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

7. Black lines 8. Black spots

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

9. Smear on back

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

10. Gradation reproduction failure

ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

11. Periodically uneven image

A ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE ABCDE

12. Uneven image density

4-26

4.5.2 Blank image

Scanner section
Section Step Check items Result Scanner section 1 Is the scanner drive transmission NO (Front side) mechanism in good condition? 2 Do the connection from CCD NO Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? 3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES 4 Is the trouble settled with above steps? NO Remedy Check and change as necessary. Reconnect / Replace harness.

Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. 1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH. Remedy Reconnect / Replace harness.

Section Step Check items Scanner section 1 Do the connection from CCD (Back side) R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? 2 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? 3 Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result NO

YES NO

Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. 1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Step Check items Result Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Remedy Correct / Replace drive coupling mechanism of toner cartridge and machine. Replace the toner cartridge. Clean. / Replace. Clean. / Replace.

2 Drum cartridge 3

Circuit boards

Transfer section

Is the developing bias or supply bias YES contact terminal dirty or deformed? Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES terminal, or drum ground contact terminal dirty or deformed? Are the connections from LPH to NO high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) Is the transfer bias contact terminal YES dirty or deformed?

Reconnect. / Replace harness.

Clean. / Replace.

4-27

Is the trouble settled with above steps?

NO

1. Replace toner cartridge. 2. Replace drum cartridge. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board. 8. Replace transfer roller unit.

4.5.3 Black image

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Does the LED lamp turn ON when (Front side) making copy with open platen cover? 2 Result Remedy YES Check step 5 and onward. NO Reconnect / Replace harness. Replace main control board.

Did 24V output between P2 pin 1 and NO 4 on Scanner board, when performing the operation of step 1? Did 24V output between P4 pin 16 NO and 18 on Scanner board, when performing the operation of step 1? Did 24V turn ON and OFF at P3 pin 2 YES on CCD board, when performing the NO operation of step 1? Are the mirrors and lens installed properly? Are the mirrors and lens dirty? Is the trouble settled with above steps? NO YES NO

Replace scanner board.

Replace LED lamp board. Replace scanner unit. Install them properly. Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. 1. Replace main control board. 2. Replace LPH board. 3. Replace LPH connect board. 4. Replace LPH.

5 6 7

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Does the DADF LED lamp turn ON (Back side) when making duplex copy? 2

Result Remedy YES Check step 5 and onward. NO Reconnect / Replace harness. Replace main control board.

Did 24V output between P2 pin 1 and NO 3 on RADF board, when performing the operation of step 1? Did 24V output between P1 pin 1 and NO 2 and P3 pin 13 and 15 on R-Scanner board, when performing the operation of step 1? Did 24V turn ON and OFF at P3 pin 2 YES on CCD board, when performing the NO operation of step 1? Are the mirrors and lens installed properly? Are the mirrors and lens dirty? Is the trouble settled with above steps? NO YES NO

Replace RADF board. * eplace the R-Scanner board R when there is no 24 V output between P3 pin 13 and 15. Replace LED lamp board. Replace scanner frame assy. Install them properly. Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. 1. Replace LPH board. 2. Replace LPH connect board. 3. Replace LPH.

5 6 7

4-28

Printer section
Section Drum cartridge Step Check item Result Remedy 1 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES Clean. / Replace. terminal, or drum ground contact terminal dirty or deformed? 2 Are the connections from LPH to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 3 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace drum cartridge. steps? 2. Replace LPH. 3. Replace LPH connect board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace main control board. 6. eplace high-voltage power R board.

Circuit boards

4.5.4 Low image density / rough image

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Is the scanner drive transmission Scanner section 1 mechanism in good condition? (Front side) 2 Are the document glass, back plate and ADF glass dirty? 3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? 4 5 Result Remedy NO Check and change as necessary. YES Clean the parts, and adjust the background level. YES Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. Is the platen cover floating by copying YES Copy with opened platen cover. a thick volume? Do the connection from CCD NO Reconnect / Replace harness Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace scanner board. steps? 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

4-29

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? (Back side) 2 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? 3 Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean the part, and adjust the background level. YES Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section LPH Step Check item 1 Is the lens dirty? Result Remedy YES Clean.

Toner cartridge 2 Drum cartridge 3

Transfer section 4 5 6

Circuit boards

Toner sensor error

Is the developing bias or supply bias YES contact terminal dirty or deformed? Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact YES terminal, or drum ground contact terminal dirty or deformed? Is the transfer bias contact terminal YES dirty or deformed? Is the transfer roller gap dirty? YES Are the connections from LPH to NO high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) Is the toner sensor working? NO (Use Sensor input test mode and check that the sensor is working.)

Clean. / Replace. Clean. / Replace.

Clean. / Replace. Clean. / Replace. Reconnect. / Replace the harness.

Reconnect. / Replace sensor.

Is the trouble settled with above steps?

NO

1. Replace toner cartridge. 2. Replace drum cartridge. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board. 8. Replace transfer roller unit.

4-30

4.5.5 Dark image density

Scanner section
Section Scanner (Front side) Step Check item 1 Are the ADF glass and document glass dirty? 2 Is the platen cover floating by copying a thick volume? 3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty? 4 5 6 7 Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? Is the connection from LED lamp to CCD board in good condition? Is the connection from CCD board to scanner board in good condition? Is the connection from scanner board to main control board in good condition? Is the connection from main control board to high-voltage power board in good condition? Result Remedy YES Clean the parts, and adjust the background level. YES Copy with opened platen cover. YES YES NO NO NO Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. Clean. / Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness. Reconnect. / Replace harness. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

NO

Reconnect. / Replace harness.

Section Scanner (Back side)

Step Check item 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? 2 3 4 5 6

7 8

Result Remedy YES Clean the part, and adjust the background level. Are the mirrors and lens dirty? YES Clean or replace the parts, and adjust the background level. Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace. Is the connection from LED lamp to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. CCD board in good condition? Is the connection from CCD board to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. R-Scanner board in good condition? Is the connection from R-Scanner NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. board to RADF board in good condition? Is the connection from RADF board to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. main control board in good condition? Is the connection from main control NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. board to high-voltage power board in good condition?

4-31

Printer section
Section Step Check item Toner cartridge 1 Is the developing or bias supply bias contact terminal dirty or deformed? Drum cartridge 2 Is the charge wire dirty? 3 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact terminal, or drum ground contact terminal dirty or deformed? Circuit boards 4 Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 5 Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. / Replace. YES YES Clean. Clean. / Replace.

NO

Reconnect. / Replace harness.

YES

1. Replace toner cartridge. 2. Replace drum cartridge. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4.5.6 Blank lines

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and (Front side) document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

4-32

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Is the DADF glass dirty? (Back side) Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Step Check item LED unit 1 Is the LED dirty? Toner cartridge 2 Is the toner layer on the developing roller normal? Fusing unit 3 Is the fusing roller or separation scraper dirty or damaged? Drum cartridge 4 Is the separation sheet dirty or damaged? Circuit boards 5 Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) Transfer section 6 Is the transfer roller dented or damaged? Discharge plate 7 Is the discharge plate deformed? 8 Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. NO Replace. YES YES NO Clean. / Replace. Clean. / Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

YES YES NO

Replace. Replace. 1. Replace drum cartridge. 2. Replace the fusing unit. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4-33

4.5.7 Void areas

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and (Front side) document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, DADF glass (Back side) and document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Step Check item LED unit 1 Is the LED dirty? Toner cartridge 2 Is the toner layer on the developing roller normal? Fusing unit 3 Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged? Drum cartridge 4 Is the drum cartridge dirty or damaged? Circuit boards 5 Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 4-34 Result Remedy YES Clean. NO Replace. YES YES NO Clean. / Replace. Clean. / Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

Transfer section 7 8 Discharge plate 9 9

Is the transfer roller dented or damaged? Is the transfer roller gap dirty? Is the discharge plate deformed? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

YES YES YES NO

Replace. Clean. / Replace. Replace. 1. Replace drum cartridge. 2. Replace fusing unit. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4.5.8 Black lines

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and (Front side) document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, DADF glass (Back side) and document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

4-35

Printer section
Section Paper path Drum cartridge Fusing unit Step 1 2 3 4 Check item Is paper path dirty with toner? Is the charge wire dirty? Is the drum dirty or damaged? Is the fusing roller or separation scraper dirty or damaged? Is the developing roller dirty or damaged? Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result YES YES YES YES YES NO Remedy Clean. Clean. Replace. Clean. / Replace. Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

Toner cartridge 5 Circuit boards 6

NO

1. Replace drum cartridge. 2. Replace fusing unit. 3. Replace toner cartridge. 4. Replace LPH. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH board. 7. Replace main control board. 8. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4.5.9 Black spots

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and (Front side) document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

4-36

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, DADF glass (Back side) and document glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Paper path Drum cartridge Fusing unit Step 1 2 3 4 Check item Is paper path dirty with toner? Is there any cleaning trouble? Is the drum dirty or damaged? Is the fusing roller or separation scraper dirty or damaged? Is the developing roller dirty or damaged? Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result YES YES YES YES YES NO Remedy Clean. Replace. Replace. Clean. / Replace. Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

Toner cartridge 5 Circuit boards 6

NO

1. Replace drum cartridge. 2. Replace fusing unit. 3. Replace toner cartridge. 4. Replace LPH. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH board. 7. Replace main control board. 8. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4-37

4.5.10 Smear on back

Printer section
Section Paper path Fusing unit Step Check item 1 Is paper path dirty with toner? 2 Is the fusing roller or separation scraper dirty or damaged? Transfer section 3 Is the transfer roller dented or damaged? Circuit boards 4 Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 5 Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. YES Clean. / Replace. YES NO Replace. Reconnect. / Replace harness.

NO

1. Replace fusing unit. 2. eplace high-voltage power R board. 3. Replace main control board.

4.5.11 Gradation reproduction failure

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Is the shading sheet under the (Front side) contact cover dirty? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

Are the document glass, back plate, and ADF glass dirty? Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

4-38

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Is the shading plate for DADF (Back side) scnanning section dirty?

Is the DADF glass dirty?

Do the connection from CCD R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above steps?

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. NO Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace R-Scanner board. 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Step Check item Toner cartridge 1 Is the developing bias or supply bias contact terminal dirty or deformed? Drum cartridge 2 Is the charge wire dirty? 3 Is the grid bias, wire electrode contact terminal, or drum ground contact terminal dirty or deformed? Circuit boards 4 Are the connections from LPH to high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 4 Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. / Replace. YES YES Clean. Clean. / Replace.

NO

Reconnect. / Replace harness.

NO

1. Replace toner cartridge. 2. Replace drum cartridge. 3. Replace LPH. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH board. 6. Replace main control board. 7. eplace high-voltage power R board.

4-39

4.5.12 Periodically uneven image

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Is the FBS motor drive gear cracked or dirty with foreign object? 2 Is the scanner motor secured properly? 3 Is the carriage adjusting part secured properly? 4 Is the carriage secured properly to the belt? 5 Are the FBS belt attached loosely? 6 Are the scanner rails damaged or dirty with foreign object? 7 Do the connection from CCD Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? 8 Is the trouble settled with above steps? Result Remedy YES Clean. / Replace. NO NO NO YES YES NO Secure properly. Secure properly. Secure properly. Adjust the belt tension. Clean. / Replace. Reconnect / Replace harness

NO

1. Replace scanner board. 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

Printer section
Section Step Check item Result Remedy Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive coupling mechanism of toner cartridge and machine. Replace toner cartridge. Drum cartridge 2 Are the drum and transfer roller NO Correct. / Replace drive driven properly? coupling mechanism of drum cartridge and machine. Replace drive coupling mechanism of transfer roller and machine. Paper path 3 Is the resist roller driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive coupling mechanism. Fusing unit 4 Is the fusing unit driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive coupling mechanism. 5 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace drum cartridge. steps? 2. Replace fusing unit. 3. Replace transfer roller unit.

4-40

4.5.13 Uneven image density

Scanner section
Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, ADF glass and (Front side) document glass dirty? Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. Is the shading sheet under the YES Clean. contact cover dirty? If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace. Do the connection from CCD NO Reconnect / Replace harness Scanner board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace scanner board. steps? 2. Replace main control board. 3. Replace LPH board. 4. Replace LPH connect board. 5. Replace LPH.

3 4

Section Step Check item Scanner section 1 Are the mirrors, lens, DADF glass (Back side) and document glass dirty?

3 4

Result Remedy YES Clean. If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. Is the shading plate for DADF YES Clean. scnanning section dirty? If the trouble is not settled by cleaning, adjust the background level. Is the LED lamp dirty or deteriorated? YES Clean. / Replace. Do the connection from CCD NO Reconnect / Replace harness R-Scanner board RADF board Main control board LPH board LPH connect board LED unit remain intact? Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace R-Scanner board. steps? 2. Replace RADF board. 3. Replace main control board. 4. Replace LPH board. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH.

4-41

Printer section
Section Step Check item Result Remedy Toner cartridge 1 Is the toner cartridge driven properly? NO Correct. / Replace drive coupling mechanism of toner cartridge and machine. Replace the toner cartridge. 2 Is the developing bias or supply bias YES Clean. / Replace. contact terminal dirty or deformed?) 3 Is the gap roller dirty or broken? YES Clean. / Replace. Drum cartridge 4 Is the charge wire dirty? YES Clean. 5 Is the drum dirty or damaged? YES Replace. Fusing unit 6 Is the fusing roller dirty or damaged? YES Clean. / Replace. Transfer section 7 Is the transfer bias contact terminal YES Clean. / Replace. dirty or deformed? 8 Is the transfer roller dented or YES Replace. damaged? Discharge plate 9 Is the discharge plate deformed? YES Replace. Circuit boards 10 Are the connections from LPH to NO Reconnect. / Replace harness. high-voltage board, and from highvoltage board to main control board in good condition? (Check plugs firmly plugged and snapped harness) 11 Is the trouble settled with above NO 1. Replace toner cartridge. steps? 2. Replace drum cartridge. 3. Replace fusing unit. 4. Replace LPH. 5. Replace LPH connect board. 6. Replace LPH board. 7. Replace main control board. 8. eplace high-voltage power R board. 9. Replace transfer roller unit.

4-42

4.6 Document trouble

Mechanical Errors
While feeding a document Symptom The ADF does not feed the document. Possible Cause The pickup roller is dirty or worn out. The power of the separation roller is getting decrease. The separation pad pressure does not match the paper quality. The motor is not rotating. The malfunction of the sensor. The motor power is not working properly. The roller is dirty. The roller is worn out. Foreign objects entered the feed area. The paper quality is not acceptable. The paper shape is not acceptable. Countermeasure Clean the roller. Replace the roller. Adjust the separation pressure. Clean the roller.

While The feeder stops the feedscanning ing job while the document document is taken into the feeder.

Replace the motor. Replace the sensor. Replace the motor. Clean the roller. Replace the roller. Remove the objects. Recommend the customer to use the document glass.

The document is stuck and gets damaged while taken into the feeder.

Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom No beep sound when you While feeding a place the document. document (The beep sound volume setting could be OFF.) Possible Cause DS1 sensor defect Countermeasure 0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor P input test mode. 1 onfirm the LCD indication changes by moving the C DS1 sensor. OFF: No document / ON: Document 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DS1 sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the RADF board. 6 eplace the harness between the RADF board and R main control board. 7 Replace the main control board. 0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor P input test mode. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the platen cover. OFF: Cover Open / ON: Document 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the APS sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the RADF board. 6 eplace the harness between the RADF board and R main control board. 7 Replace the main control board.

APS sensor defect

4-43

Symptom

Possible Cause

Countermeasure 0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor P input test mode. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening the ADF cover and inserting a paper. OFF: No document / ON: Document 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DS2 sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the main control board. 0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor P input test mode. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening the ADF cover and inserting a paper. 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the DS3 sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the CCD board. 6 eplace the harness between CCD board and R R-Scanner board. 7 Replace the R-Scanner board. 8 eplace the harness between the R-Scanner board R and RADF board. 7 Replace the RADF board. 8 eplace the harness between the RADF board and R main control board. 9 Replace the main control board. Check DS1 sensor defect, DS2 sensor defect and DS3 sensor defect in that order.

DS2 sensor defect While The machine feeds the feeding document through the ADF document without scanning. While scanning a document The scan starting and ending area are not correct.

DS3 sensor defect

While a The LCD shows a warnDS1, DS2 or DS3 document ing while a document exits sensor defect exits after scanning. The LCD shows a warning after a document exits. Others The message, Please close the flashing cover. is displayed on the LCD. The flashing cover: The ADF cover TXIL sensor defect

0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to display the sensor P input test mode. 1 Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening and closing the ADF cover. OFF : Cover open / ON: Cover close 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the TXIL sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the RADF board. 6 eplace the harness between the RADF board and R main control board. 7 Replace the connect board.

4-44

Scanning trouble
Symptom An unusual noise occurs. While scanning Possible Cause Countermeasure Check the belt. Check the connectors. Replace. Replace. Replace the carriage. Replace the harness. Replace the scanner board. Check the connectors. Replace. Replace. Replace the R-Scanner Assy. Replace the harness. Replace the RADF board. Replace the harness. Replace the main control board. 0 ress <Setting>, <*>, <2>, <2> to disP play the sensor input test mode. 1 emove the document glass and move R the carriage by hand, and confirm that the LCD indication changes. OFF: Not home position ON : Home position 2 Check the sensor harness is firmly connected. 3 If the LCD indication does not change, replace the HS sensor. 4 Replace the sensor harness. 5 Replace the scanner board. 6 eplace the harness between scanner R board and main control board. 1 Check the motor harness is firmly connected. 2 Replace the FBS motor. 1 Check the connectors are firmly connected to the scanner board. 2 eplace the harness between scanner R board and main control board. 3 Replace the scanner board. 4 Replace the main control board.

The belt has not been firmly inserted into the belt holder. The lamp at Harness is not firmly inserted to the FBS does connector. not turn on LED lamp board defect. LED lamp board harness defect. CCD board defect. Harness between CCD board and scanner board defect. Scanner board defect. The lamp in Harness is not firmly inserted to the DADF does connector. not turn on LED lamp board defect. LED lamp board harness defect. CCD board defect. Harness between R-Scannser board and RADF board is defected. RADF board defect. Harness between RADF board and main control board is defected. Main control board defect. The carriage HS sensor defect. is touching the home side (on the left toward the front)

The carriage FBS motor defect. does not move. Scanner board defect.

4-45

4.7 Recording Paper Jam

After removing the jammed paper, please open and close the side cover. Mechanical errors Symptom Jam in the paper supply area Possible cause Countermeasure

Faulty movement of some cassette Check each movement of a cassette part. parts. Replace the faulty part. Paper is stuck in the recording area. The paper feed roller is worn out. Remove the stuck paper. Replace the roller. Remove the jammed paper.

Jam in the feed Paper is stuck in the feed area. area

Jam in the Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper Remove the jammed paper. fuser or the exit area. paper exit area The fuser roller is not clean. Clean the fuser roller. Replace the fuser roller. Electrical errors
Symptom Possible cause Countermeasure Check the wiring. Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch. Replace the main control board. Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or Main control board. Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PSS, or the main control board. Check the paper, size setting.

The paper supply electromagnetic Jam in the feed area clutch does not work. Please close the flashing cover. The paper supply sensor (PSS) does not work. Jam in the feed The malfunction of the PPS. area Please close the flashing cover. Jam in the feed area Check paper size..... Jam in the fuser or paper exit area The paper size is not correct.

The paper discharge sensor (PDS) does not work.

Check that the wiring and actuators are working properly. If confirmed OK, then replace the PDS, or LPH board.

4-46

4.8 Machine malfunction

No. Symptom 1 What to confirm Countermeasure Press the energy save key, and release the mode. Check No.2. Check No.3. Plug the cable correctly. Check No.4. Power on. Check No.5. Replace the power supply. The LCD shows 1. s the machine in energy save mode? Yes I nothing. No 2. s the power cable plugged correctly? Yes I No 3. Is the power switch On? Yes No Yes 4. Does the DC output voltages from No the power supply unit to connector P3 on the main control boar have the following output?

Pin 7, 9 +3.3 V Pin 15, 17 +5.0 V Pin 2, 4, 6 +12.0V Pin 12, 14 +24.0V P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND 8, 10, 11, 13, 19, 21, 23
5. Is the following connection OK? CD assembly to the Panel PCB. L (P12) anel PCB (P4) to the harness to the P main control board. (P51A) 6. If you replace the panel board, the symptom will be fixed. 7. If you replace the main board, the symptom will be fixed. The LCD shows 1. f you close the flashing cover, the I Please close symptom will be fixed. the flashing 2. s the cover secured firmly by I cover. screws? 3. s the message shown after energy I save mode is released? 4. oes the LPH board P93-8 have D +24V output? 5. Press the sensor in the message and check the output changes to +3V through GND. (The interlock +24V through GND.) Interlock : LPH board P93-11 JAMC1 : LPH board P93-3 JAMC2: Main control board P17-7 ADF cover: ain control board P82-1 M 6. If you replace LPH board or the connecting harness, the message will disappear. 7. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Check No.6. Reconnect the connection or replace the harness.

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No No

Replace the panel board. Check No.7. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Solved. Check No.2. Check No.3. Secure the cover properly. Check No.4. Check No.5. Check No.5. Check No.6. Replace the sensor or the harness.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No

Check No.6. Check No.6. Check No.7. Check No.7. Replace the circuit board or the harness. Check No.7. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

4-47

No 3

Symptom

What to confirm

Countermeasure Yes Check No. 2. No Check No. 3 Yes Recommend the customer to use the document glass. No Check No. 8. Yes Check No. 4. No Check No. 5. Yes Solved. No Check No. 5. Yes Recommend the customer to use the document glass. No Check No. 6. Yes Check No. 7. No Check No. 8. Yes Check No. 23. No Check No. 24. Yes Check No. 9. No Replace the clutch. Yes Check No. 11. No Check No. 10. Yes Check No. 11. No Adjust the gear. Yes Check No. 12. No Replace the ADF motor. Yes Check No. 13. No Adjust the separation pad pressure. Yes Check No. 14. No Replace the power supply. Yes Replace the harness between the power supply and main control board. No Check No. 15. Yes Check No. 16. No Replace the main control board. Yes Check No. 17. No Re-install it properly. Yes Check No. 18. No Replace the DS1 sensor feeler. Yes Check No. 19. No Replace the DS2 sensor feeler. Yes Remove the objects. No Check No. 20.

Documents jam 1. Did you feed a single document? frequently. The LCD shows 2. Did you use thin paper or conPlease reset verted paper? the document. 3. Did you set documents more than the capacity? 4. f you set documents within the I capacity, the symptom be fixed. 5. id you use wrinkled or curled D documents? 6. Does the machine still feed documents? 7. Does the machine still discharge documents? 8. Does the clutch rotate properly? 9. oes the separate roller work D properly? 10. oes the transfer gear work D properly? 11. Does the ADF motor rotate properly? 12. Is the separation pad pressure appropriate? 13. Do CN201-4, 5, 6 and 7 of the power supply have +24V output? 14. If you replace the harness between the power supply and main control board, the message will disappear. 15. Do P3-12, 14, 16, and 18 on the main control board have +24V output ? 16. Has the DS1 sensor been installed properly? 17. Does the feeler for the DS1 sensor work properly? 18. Does the feeler for the DS2 sensor work properly? 19. Are there any foreign objects stuck around paper guides?

20. oes the voltage level of P82-. on Yes Check No. 22. D No Check No. 21. the main control panel change to +0V when the DS1 is ON, and to +5V when the DS1 is OFF? 21. If you replace the DS1 sensor, the Yes Replace the DS1. No Replace the main control board. symptom will be fixed.

4-48

No. 3

Symptom

What to confirm Yes No

Countermeasure Check No. 23. Check No. 24.

D Documents jam 22. oes the voltage level of P82-6 on frequently. the main control panel change to The LCD shows +0V when the DS2 is ON, and to Please reset the +5V when the DS2 is OFF? document. 23. If you replace the DS2 sensor, the symptom will be fixed. 24. Is the separation roller dirty? 25. Is the separation pad dirty?

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

Replace the DS2. Replace the main control board. Replace the separation roller. Check No. 25. Replace the separation pad. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Re-adjust the guides properly. Set only the same size documents. Check No. 3. Remove the objects. Check No. 4. Replace them. Check No. 5. Check their operations. Check No. 6.

Documents skew 1. ave the document guides been H adjusted properly? 2. id you place different size docuD ments at the same time? 3. Are there any foreign objects on the paper pass? 4. ave the separator roller and the H pad separator been worn out? 5. re there any problems with on A the installations and operations of the separator roller and the pad separator? 6. Is the guide outer deformed?

Yes No Yes No

Fix or replace it. Replace the machine. Recommend customer to use the document glass. Check No. 2. Remove the objects. Check No. 3. Check No. 4. Check No. 6. Repair or replace it. Check No. 7. Replace the separation pad. Replace the machine.

Documents get wrinkled or torn frequently.

1. Are they thin documents?

2. Are there any foreign objects on the document tray? 3. o the documents get wrinkled or D torn around the feeding entry area? 4. Has the entry area of the guide outer been deformed? 5. Is the separation pad dirty?

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

4-49

No. 6

Symptom

What to confirm Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 7. Check No. 3. Connect the harness. Clean, or replace them. Check No. 4. Clean, or replace them. Check No. 5. Check No. 4. Reattach them. Replace the sensor or the harness. Check No. 7. Replace the carriage or the harness. Check No. 8. Replace the circuit board or the harness. Check No. 9. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No.2. Re-load paper.

The warning mes- 1. Has the lamp been illuminated? sage Lamp error. Call for service. 2. Is the CCD harness connecting coris displayed. rectly? 3. Are the sheet document press or back ground level plate dirty? 4. Are the document glass or the mirrors dirty? 5. Are the mirror carriage belts or the home sensor attached correctly? 6. If you replace the home sensor or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 7. If you replace the LED lamp board or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 8. If you replace the carriage or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 9. If you replace the main control board or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed.

The message No Paper is displayed.

1. Did you load paper in the cassette properly? 2. Press the paper detection feeler when the machine is in ready mode, and check the sensor output changes to +3V through GND. Cassette 1 : Main control board P14-4 Cassette 2 : Main control board P15-4 4. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

Replace the sensor or the harness. Check No. 3. Replace the sensor or the harness. Check No. 4. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Remove the paper. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Replace the PSS sensor or the connecting harness.

Paper jams or the 1. Is there any paper jam on the paper pass? message Open the flashing cover 2. Is there electrical continuity in the and check...... harness between the PSS sensor is displayed. and the main control board? 3. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PDS sensor and the LPH board? 4. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the main control board and the LPH board? 5. If you replace the PSS sensor or the PDS sensor, the message will disappear. 6. If you replace the LPH board, the message will disappear? (PDS sensor only) 7. If you replace the main control board, the message will disappear.

YES Check No. 4. NO Replace the connecting harness. YES Check No. 5. NO Replace the connecting harness. Yes No Yes No Yes No Replace the sensor. Check No. 6. Replace the LPHboard. Check No. 7. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

4-50

No. 9

Symptom Paper skew.

What to confirm 1. If you re-load the document and make more than 10 copies, paper skew still occurs. 2. Has the paper cassette been installed properly? 3. oes the cassette have any malfuncD tions? Yes No Yes No Yes No

Countermeasure Check No. 2. Solved. Check No. 3. Re-install it properly. Replace the cassette. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. The senders problem. (It might be caused by using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission problems.)

10 When using the auto feeder, the reception image expanded.

Yes 1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the No image will expands more vertically than horizontally. Note: he following causes are also T possible. The sender sent the document data using unsuitable documents like excessively thick paper, no carbon paper, rear carbon paper, and so on. 2. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No

Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. The senders problem. (It might be caused by sender transmission problems.) Check No. 3. Clean resist roller. Replace resist roller or the fuser. Check No. 4. Replace the electromagnetic clutch. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. The senders problem. (Possible causes are inappropriate contrast setting, using colored documents, poor line connection, using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission problems.)

11 When using the auto feeder, the reception image compressed.

1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the image is more compressed vertically than horizontally. 2. If you pull out a paper from resist roller and the fuser, the friction is normal. 3. The electromagnetic clutch is normal. 4. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

12 The printouts are 1. Are copied and test print images too too light. light, or uneven density? Note: he following causes are also T possible. The contrast setting might be not appropriate. Contrast irregularities are likely on printouts of documents containing thin lines or small blue lettering. 2. If you replace the toner or the drum cartridge, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes No

Replace the toner or the drum cartridge. Refer to the Image Quality Problems. Follow the instruction manual. Check No. 2. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

13 Clock malfunction

1. Are there any errors in the clock setting process? 2. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

Yes No Yes No

4-51

No. Symptom

What to confirm Yes No Yes No 3. oes the machine communicate with D a right working machine? 4. If you replace the NCU board or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Stop using the password verification, then check No. 3. Enter the correct password. The operation might wrong, or counter machine might have problem. Check No. 4. Replace the NCU board or the harness. Check No. 5. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Set auto reception mode. Replace the NCU board or the harness. Check No. 3. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Set the correct line type. Replace the NCU board or the harness. Check No. 3. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Set the volume except OFF. Check No. 2. Check No. 3. Set up the setting. Replace the speaker or the harness. Check No. 3. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

1. s the machine verifying the passI 15 The machine word? does not receive or send a FAX. 2. Is the password correct?

16 The auto memory reception does not work.

1. Has the auto reception been set? 2. If you replace the NCU board or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 3. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

17 A dial signal output fails after entering the number from the numeric keys.

1. Has the line type setting been set correctly ? 2. If you replace the NCU board or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 3. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

18 The line monitor does not work.

1. as the volume setting been set to H OFF? 2. Has the setting for the line monitor been set up? 3. If you replace the speaker or the connecting harness, the symptom will be fixed. 4. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed.

4-52

No.

Symptom

What to confirm 1. Does the sound occur during scanning? 2. Does the sound occur during scanning using the ADF or document glass ? 3. re there any objects interfering with A the roller or roller shaft? 4. Has the ADF motor sounded abnormal? 5. re there any objects interfering with A the ADF gear? 6. Has the FBS motor sounded abnormal? 7. re there any objects interfering with A the FBS gear? 8. re there any objects interfering with A the FBS pulley? 9. re there any objects interfering with A the mirror carriage traveling surface? 10. oes the sound occur while recordD ing? 11. f you remove the drum or toner carI tridge, the sound still occurs. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

Countermeasure Check No. 2. Check No. 10. Check No. 3. Check No. 6. Remove the objects. Check No. 4. Clean the roller. Check the harness. Check No. 5. Remove the objects. Check No. 6. Check the harness. Check No. 7. Remove the objects. Check No. 8. Remove the objects. Check No. 9. Remove the objects using lint free waste. Check No. 10. Check No. 11. Check No. 17. Check No. 12. Replace the toner or drum cartridge. Remove the objects. Check No. 13. Replace the toner or drum cartridge. Check No. 14. Replace the transfer roller or fuser. Check No. 15. Remove the objects. Check No. 16. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine. Check No. 2. Connect it. Check No. 5. Check No. 3. Check No. 4. Charge the battery. Replace the battery. Check No. 5. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

19 An unusual sound occurs.

12. re there any objects interfering with Yes A the drum gear, developing gear, or No transfer gear? 13. If you replace the toner or drum cartridge, the symptom will be fixed. 14. If you replace the transfer roller or fuser, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No

15. re there any objects interfering with Yes A No the driving mechanism? 16. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed. 20 The document memory can not be backed up. 1. ave the main control board and the H battery been connected to P81? 2. s the battery voltage above +3V I when the machine in shut down? 3. Did you charge the battery for more than 24 hours? 4. If you replace the battery, the symptom will be fixed. 5. If you replace the main control board, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No

4-53

No.

Symptom

What to confirm 1. s the power cord connected correct I and power switch is turned on. 2. Is the electrical outlet is on? Yes No Yes No

Countermeasure Check No.2. Connect the power cord and turn the power on. Check No.3. Connect the machine to a proper outlet. Check No.4. Replace the power supply.

21 Unit will not power up.

3. Does the DC output voltages from the Yes power supply unit to connector P3 on No the main control boar have the following output?

Pin 7, 9 +3.3 V Pin 15, 17 +5.0 V Pin 2, 4, 6 +12.0V Pin 12, 14 +24.0V P i n 1 , 3 , 5 , GND 8, 10, 11, 13, 19, 21, 23
4. Is the connection between the power supply unit and the main control board OK? 5. If you replace the main board, the symptom will be fixed. Yes No Check No.5. Reconnect the connection or replace the harness. Replace the main control board. Replace the machine.

Yes No

4-54

5 Maintenance & Adjustment

5.1 Maintenance schedule
Scanning Section
Maintenance Cycle (pages) Reference Page Clean Replace Covers Touch panel display ADF glass / DADF glass See AdministraSee Administratorss Guide torss Guide Document glass Platen cover Platen cover pad Mirrors *1 5-45 60,000 sheets/letter Assy Piece Separator *2 5-21 Wipe it with a soft cloth or 2 years dampened with water. 60,000 sheets/letter Roller Separate *2 5-22 If that does not clean the or 2 years part, wipe it first with a soft 60,000 sheets/letter Roller Pickup *2 5-22 cloth dampened with natuor 2 years ral detergent, then wipe it Roller Feed / Roller Press 5-33 with a soft cloth dampened Roller Exit ADF / Roller Press 5-31 with water. 20,000 hours (light Lamp 5-43, 5-15 intensity: 70%) *1 means to clean the parts when image quality problems occurs. *2 Replace these parts at the same time. Parts Name

Printer Section
Parts Name Maintenance Cycle (pages) Clean Replace Reference Page See Users Guide 5-100 5-101 5-105 5-89

Printer head Roller Pickup *3 Assy Piece Pressure *3 Roller Feed (Cassette 2) Roller Feed Duplex / Roller Press Roller Pickup MP Pad Pressure MP

Pull the cleaning rod

60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 100,000 sheets/letter

Wipe it with a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

100,000 sheets/letter 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 60,000 sheets/letter or 2 years 100,000 sheets/letter 100,000 sheets/letter 100,000 sheets/letter 60,000 sheets/letter 100,000 sheets/letter

5-82 5-82 5-78 5-88 5-83 5-75 5-99

Roller Register Roller Exit Fuser Roller Transfer Filter VOC *3 Replace these parts at the same time.

Note
The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The maintenance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed to maintain the machine quality.

5-1

5.2 Disassembly procedures

Before assembling,
Disconnect the power cable Disconnect the line cable and other cables Pull out the toner cartridge from the machine Pull out the drum cartridge from the machine, and cover it with a black clothe

5.2.1 ADF Section .................................................................................................................... 5-4

TRAY DOCUMENT .............................................................................................................................5-4 COVER CONNECT .............................................................................................................................5-5 COVER PLATEN.................................................................................................................................5-6 COVER TX B.......................................................................................................................................5-7 COVER TX F .......................................................................................................................................5-8 DADF COVER TX ...............................................................................................................................5-9 SENSOR (APS).................................................................................................................................5-10 DADF FRAME SCANNER ................................................................................................................5-11 PCB RS .............................................................................................................................................5-12 COVER UPPER SCANNER ..............................................................................................................5-13 PCB R-SCANNER.............................................................................................................................5-14 PCB LED-LAMP DADF .....................................................................................................................5-15 MIRROR C/D.....................................................................................................................................5-16 DADF GUIDE INNER A.....................................................................................................................5-17 ROLLER REGIST..............................................................................................................................5-19 DRS SENSOR...................................................................................................................................5-20 ASSY PAD SEPARATOR .................................................................................................................5-21 ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR ..........................................................................................................5-22 ROLLER PRESS A ...........................................................................................................................5-24 DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE .......................................................................5-25 GEARS (FRONT) ..............................................................................................................................5-26 CLUTCH ............................................................................................................................................5-27 SENSOR TXIL / DS1.........................................................................................................................5-28 MOTOR (STEPPING) .......................................................................................................................5-29 GEARS (BACK).................................................................................................................................5-30 ROLLER EXIT ...................................................................................................................................5-31 SENSOR DS2 ...................................................................................................................................5-32 ROLLER FEED B ..............................................................................................................................5-33 ROLLER FEED A ..............................................................................................................................5-34 PCB RADF ........................................................................................................................................5-36 Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS ..................................................................................5-37

5.2.2 Scanner section .............................................................................................................. 5-38

ASSY COVER CONTACT.................................................................................................................5-38 ASSY COVER TOP...........................................................................................................................5-39 FRAME SCANNER FBS ...................................................................................................................5-40 SENSOR HS .....................................................................................................................................5-42 PCB LED-LAMP FBS ........................................................................................................................5-43 HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE ..................................................................................................................5-44 MIRROR A/B/C .................................................................................................................................5-45 MOTOR (STEPPING) .......................................................................................................................5-46 PCB SCANNER ................................................................................................................................5-48

5.2.3 Panel section .................................................................................................................. 5-49

PANEL...............................................................................................................................................5-49 DISPLAY (LCD).................................................................................................................................5-50 SPEAKER .........................................................................................................................................5-52 PCB PANEL ......................................................................................................................................5-53 PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2 ..................................................................................................................5-54 INVERTER ........................................................................................................................................5-54

5.2.4 PCB section .................................................................................................................... 5-55

PCB PDL ...........................................................................................................................................5-55 POWER-SUPPLY .............................................................................................................................5-56 PCB IS...............................................................................................................................................5-57 PCB LPH ...........................................................................................................................................5-58 5-2

PCB MAIN .........................................................................................................................................5-59 PCB NCU ..........................................................................................................................................5-60 PCB PSU...........................................................................................................................................5-61 PCB CONNECT LPH ........................................................................................................................5-62

5.2.5 Printer section................................................................................................................. 5-64

TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD .......................................................................................................5-64 COVER FRONT ................................................................................................................................5-65 COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD ...................................................................................................5-66 COVER BACK ...................................................................................................................................5-67 COVER JAM ACCESS......................................................................................................................5-68 SOLENOID ........................................................................................................................................5-69 CLUTCH ............................................................................................................................................5-70 RX MOTOR .......................................................................................................................................5-71 MOTOR (STEPPING) .......................................................................................................................5-72 FRAME DRIVE/GEARS ....................................................................................................................5-73 ROLLER TRANSFER........................................................................................................................5-75 ROLLER REGISTER.........................................................................................................................5-78 SENSOR TRAYS ..............................................................................................................................5-79 SENSOR JAMC1 ..............................................................................................................................5-80 SENSOR PSS ...................................................................................................................................5-81 ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP ....................................................................................5-82 PRINTER FUSER .............................................................................................................................5-83 THERMISTOR...................................................................................................................................5-84 SCRAPER .........................................................................................................................................5-85 ROLLER PRESS ...............................................................................................................................5-85 ASSY INTERLOCK ...........................................................................................................................5-86 SENSOR PDS/DPS/SHIFT ...............................................................................................................5-87 SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT ..........................................................................................5-88 ROLLER FEED DUPLEX ..................................................................................................................5-89 TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS) .........................................................................................................5-91 SENSOR PES1 .................................................................................................................................5-93 SENSOR OPEN1 ..............................................................................................................................5-94 PRINTER HEAD................................................................................................................................5-95 MOTOR (STEPPING) .......................................................................................................................5-97 WEIGHT PAPER A/B ........................................................................................................................5-98 FILTER VOC .....................................................................................................................................5-99

5.2.6 Paper feeding section ................................................................................................... 5-100

ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST) ..........................................................................................5-100 ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST) ............................................................................5-101 PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust) .....................................................................................5-102 SENSOR JAMC2 ............................................................................................................................5-103 SENSOR PES2 ...............................................................................................................................5-104 ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST) ......................................................................................................5-105 PLATE FRAME B ............................................................................................................................5-106 ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST) .....................................................................................................5-107 SOLENOID (2nd CST) ....................................................................................................................5-108 SENSOR OPEN2 ............................................................................................................................5-109

5-3

5.2.1 ADF Section

TRAY DOCUMENT
1. Release one hook [2] from the Cover platen [1]. 2. Remove the TRAY DOCUMENT [3]. [3]

[2]

[1]

5-4

COVER CONNECT
1. Remove one screw [1], then remove the COVER CONNECT [2]. 2. Disconnect two connectors [3].

[3]

[2] [1] [3]

Important
When attaching the Cover connect, be careful not to pinch the harness.

5-5

COVER PLATEN
1. Remove one screw [1], then remove the COVER CONNECT [2]. 2. Disconnect two connectors [3]. 3. Remove one screw [4].

[3]

[2] [1] [3]

[4] 4. Open the Cover platen [5], and lift upwards. 5. Tilt the Cover platen [5] back a little and release the hook [7] on the Hinge [6]. Then, remove the COVER PLATEN [5].

[6] [5]

[7]

5-6

COVER TX B
1. Open the Cover platen [1]. 2. Remove one screw [2].

[1]

[2]

3. Close the Cover platen [1]. 4. Open the DADF cover TX [3]. 5. Release the two hooks [4], then remove the COVER TX B [5].

[3]

[4] [5]

5-7

COVER TX F
1. Open the Cover platen [1]. 2. Remove one screw [2]. [1] [2]

3. Close the Cover platen [1]. 4. Open the DADF cover TX [3]. 5. Release one hook [4], then remove the COVER TX F [5]. [3] [5]

[4]

5-8

DADF COVER TX
1. Remove the Cover TX B. (See COVER TX B) 2. Remove the Cover TX F. (See COVER TX F) 3. Remove the two shafts [1], then remove the DADF COVER TX [2]. * When removing the DADF COVER TX, lift it up slightly and remove it from the shaft on the front. 4. Remove one screw [3].

[3]

[1] [2] [1]

5-9

SENSOR (APS)
1. Remove the Cover TX F. (See COVER TX F) 2. Open the DADF Guide inner A [1]. 3. Release the hook from the inside and disconnect the connector, then remove the SENSOR (APS) [2]. [1]

[2]

5-10

DADF FRAME SCANNER

1. Open the DADF cover TX [1]. 2. Open the DADF guide inner A [2]. 3. Release the four hooks [3], then remove the DADF FRAME SCANNER [4]. * There are four springs [5] that will come off in this procedure. Be sure not to lose any. [1] [2]

[5] [4] [3] [5]

[3] [3]

4. Disconnect one connector [6]. 5. Release the two hooks [7], then remove the Cover PCB scanner [8]. 6. Disconnect two connectors [9], then remove the DADF FRAME SCANNER [10].

[7]

[8] [10] [6] [9]

[9]

5-11

PCB RS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the Shaft press exit [1] and Roller press A [2]. Remove the two screws [3]. Remove the Cover lower scanner [5] while releasing the two hooks [4]. Remove one screw [6], then remove the Plate shield DADF B [7]. Disconnect the connector [8] and remove one screw [9], then remove the PCB RS [10]. [6] [9] [7] [10] [8] [3] [5]

[2]

[4] [3] [4] [1]

[2]

CAUTION
When removing the Cover lower scanner, be careful not to break the Glass contact.

Important
When assembling the Shaft press exit, make sure the side with the notch goes on the front side.

5-12

COVER UPPER SCANNER

1. 2. 3. 4. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the Cover lower scanner. (See PCB RS) Remove one screw [1]. [1]

5. Turn the DADF frame scanner over and remove the three screws [2], then remove the Plate shield DADF A [3]. 6. Remove the film harness [4]. 7. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Plate FG DADF [6]. 8. Remove the four screws [7]. 9. Remove the COVER UPPER SCANNER [8]. [5] [6] [7] [7] [2]

[4] [8] [2] [7] [7]

[3]

[2]

5-13

PCB R-SCANNER
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the three screws [1], then remove the Plate shield DADF A [2]. Remove the film harness [3]. Remove the four screws [4]. Remove the PCB R-SCANNER [5]. [4] [4]

[1]

[5] [3] [4] [4] [1] [1] [2]

5-14

PCB LED-LAMP DADF

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the Cover lower scanner. (See PCB RS) Remove one screw [1] and one screw on the rear [2], then remove the Plate FG DADF [3]. Remove the two screws [4]. Disconnect the connector [5] and remove the Holder PCB LED ADF [6]. Remove the three Springs P LED PCB [7], then remove the PCB LED-LAMP DADF [8]. [1] [4] [7] [3]

[4] [7] [8] [7] [6] [2]

[5]

NOTE
When you have replaced the lamp to a new one, set the background level. (See page 3-99.) hen you have replaced the lamp to a new one, set the lamp type according to the numbers of LED on W Machine Parameter 022 bit7. (See page 3-9.)

5-15

MIRROR C/D
1. 2. 3. 4. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the Cover upper scanner. (See COVER UPPER SCANNER) Release the six Mirror clamps [1], and remove MIRROR C [2] and MIRROR D [3]. [1] [1] [1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[1]

5-16

DADF GUIDE INNER A

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Cut the tie wrap [1]. Remove the four screws [2], then remove the Plate shield DADF C [3]. Disconnect all PCB RADF [4] connectors. Remove one screw [5]. Remove the four hooks [6] on the Guide harness, then remove the harness from the Guide harness. [2] [2] [3] [2]

[2]

[6]

[6] [6] [1]

[4]

[5]

[6]

8. Remove one screw [7], then remove the Guide harness [8]. [7] [8]

5-17

9. Disconnect one connector [9]. 10. Remove one SR4 [10], then remove the Clutch [11]. 11. Remove one E-ring [12], then slide the Bearing D6 8 [13] to the outer end. 12. Remove the DADF GUIDE INNER A [14] by lifting it up. [14]

[12]

[13]

[9]

[10] [11]

5-18

ROLLER REGIST
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Turn the DADF guide inner A [1] over and remove one E-ring [2]. Remove Bearing D6 [3], then remove the ROLLER REGIST [4]. [1]

[2]

[3] [4]

5-19

DRS SENSOR
1. Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) 2. Remove the harness [1] from its path. 3. Disconnect the connector and release the hook, then remove the DRS SENSOR [2].

[1]

[2]

5-20

ASSY PAD SEPARATOR

1. Open the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) 2. Release the two hooks [1], then remove the ASSY PAD SEPARATOR [2].

[2] [1] [1]

5-21

ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the five screws [1], then remove the Guide outer A [2]. Remove one E-ring [3]. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the Gear 26 [5] and Bearing D6 8 [6]. Remove the four E-rings [7]. Remove the two Bearings D6 [8], and move the two Bearings D6 [9] toward the center. [1] [1] [1] [2] [1]

[1]

[7] [4] [5] [6] [3] [7] [8]

[7]

[7]

[9]

[9] [8]

7. Remove the ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR [10].

5-22

[10]

5-23

ROLLER PRESS A
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the Guide outer A. (See ASSY ROLLER SEPARATOR) Remove one screw [1], then remove the Holder register [2] from the Shaft press roller [3]. Lift up the Shaft press roller [3] and remove the ROLLER PRESS A [4]. [4] [4] [3] [4] [1] [2]

5-24

DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Tray document. (See TRAY DOCUMENT) Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the Sensor (APS). (See SENSOR (APS)) Remove one screw [1] and release the hook, then remove the Cover stamp [2]. Remove the six screws [3]. Remove one screw [4] and remove the ground wire from its path. Remove the DADF GUIDE INNER B [5] equipped with DADF DRIVE. [3]

[5] [3] [4]

[3]

[3] [3]

[1]

[3]

[2]

5-25

GEARS (FRONT)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Tray document. (See TRAY DOCUMENT) Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE.(See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) 6. Remove one screw [1] and SR5 [2], then remove the Frame tension F [3], Tension pulley [4], and Spring C tension F [5]. 7. Remove the three E-rings [6], then remove the two Pulleys 24 6 [7], P pin 2 x 10 [8], and Belt (timing) [9]. 8. Remove two Bearings D6 [10] and one Bearing D6 8 [11]. 9. Remove the two screws [12], then remove the Plate hinge inner A [13]. 10. Remove one SR5 [14], then remove the Torque-limiter [15] and GEAR 36 0.8 [16].

[8] [10] [6] [11] [7] [ ] [ ] 6 3 [8] [12] [10] [9] [15] [13] [12] [16] [14] [7] [6] [5] [4] [2] [1]

5-26

CLUTCH
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover TX B. (See COVER TX B) Remove the harness guide. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Disconnect the two connectors [1]. Remove the two screws [2], then remove the Stay drive sensor [3] and Clutch [4].

[2] [1] [4] [3] [1] [2]

5. Remove the Gear 15 [5], then remove one SR4 [6] and Bearing D6 [7]. 6. Remove the Shaft clutch separator [8], then remove the CLUTCH [9]. [8]

[5] [6]

[7]

[9]

[3]

5-27

SENSOR TXIL / DS1

1. Remove the Cover TX B. (See COVER TX B) 2. Disconnect two connectors [1], then remove the SENSOR TXIL [2], and SENSOR DS1 [3]. [2] [3]

[1] [1]

5-28

MOTOR (STEPPING)
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) 5. Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH) 6. Remove the three screws [1], then remove the Frame motor [2]. [1]

[2]

[1] [1]

7. Remove the Gear 35 A [3]. 8. Remove the two screws [4], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [5].

[4] [3] [5]

[4]

5-29

GEARS (BACK)
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) 5. Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH) 6. Remove the Frame motor. (See MOTOR (STEPPING)) 7. Remove the GEAR 52/30 [1]. 8. Remove the GEAR 69/41 [2]. 9. Remove the GEAR 49/32 [3]. 10. Remove the two GEARs 35B [4]. 11. Remove the two E-rings [5], then remove the two GEARs 52A [6]. 12. Remove the Bearing D6 [7] and Bearing D6 8 [8].

[4]

[7] [6] [5] [2] [8] [3] [6] [5] [1]

[4]

5-30

ROLLER EXIT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) Remove the Gears (front). (See GEARS (FRONT)) Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH) Remove the Frame motor. (See MOTOR (STEPPING)) Remove the Gears (back). (See GEARS (BACK)) Remove the ROLLER EXIT [1].

[1]

5-31

SENSOR DS2
1. 2. 3. 4. Open the DADF cover TX [1]. Open the DADF guide inner A [2]. Peel back the seal [3], then remove one screw [4]. Disconnect the connector and remove the SENSOR DS2 [5]. [1]

[2]

[5] [4] [3]

5-32

ROLLER FEED B
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) Remove the Gears (front). (See GEARS (FRONT)) Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH) Remove the Frame motor. (See MOTOR (STEPPING)) Remove the Gears (back). (See GEARS (BACK)) Remove the ROLLER FEED B [1].

[1]

5-33

ROLLER FEED A
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the DADF cover TX. (See DADF COVER TX) Remove the DADF frame scanner. (See DADF FRAME SCANNER) Remove the DADF guide inner A. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove the DADF guide inner B equipped with DADF DRIVE. (See DADF GUIDE INNER B equipped with DADF DRIVE) 5. Remove the Gears (front). (See GEARS (FRONT)) 6. Remove the Stay drive sensor and Clutch. (See CLUTCH) 7. Remove the Frame motor. (See MOTOR (STEPPING)) 8. Remove the Gears (back). (See GEARS (BACK)) 9. Remove the two screws [1] and two hooks [2], then remove the Guide inner B [3]. 10. Remove the two screws [4], then remove the Bracket DS2 [5]. 11. Pull the harness [6] out through the hole. 12. Remove the Guide inner D [7]. 13. Remove one E-ring [8] and Bearing D6 [9]. [1] [7] [3]

[2]

[4] [5] [4] [2]

[1]

[6]

[9]

[8]

5-34

13. Remove four screws [10], then remove the Frame drive [11]. 14. Remove the ROLLER FEED A [12].

[12]

[11] [10] [10]

[10] [10]

5-35

PCB RADF
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover TX B. (See COVER TX B) Disconnect all connectors. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove one screw. (See DADF GUIDE INNER A) Remove three screws [1], then remove the PCB RADF [2].

[1] [1] [1] [2]

5-36

Assembling the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Cover platen [1]. Lay the Sheet document press [2] on the document glass, leaving 1 mm of clearance from the left corner. Peel off the backing paper from the double-sided tape [3] on the Sheet document press. Close the Cover platen [1]. Lightly press down on the Cover platen to affix the SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS [2].

[1]

[3]

1m m

[2]
1m m

[3]

5-37

5.2.2 Scanner section

ASSY COVER CONTACT
1. Open the Cover platen [1]. 2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the ASSY COVER CONTACT [3].

[2] [2] [3]

[1]

Caution
When removing the ASSY cover contact, be careful not to break the Glass contact.

5-38

ASSY COVER TOP

1. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) 2. Remove six screws [1], then remove the ASSY COVER TOP [2]. [1] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [1]

Caution
When removing the ASSY cover top, be careful not to break the Pane.

5-39

FRAME SCANNER FBS

1. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) 2. Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) 3. Remove the Flat harness [1], then remove the Core [2].

[1] [2]

4. Remove the Flat harness [1] from its path. 5. Release the BELT (TIMING) [4] from the hooks [3] on the Frame scanner FBS.

[3]

[1]

[4]

5-40

6. Lift up the Shaft guide [5] and remove the FRAME SCANNER FBS [6].

[5] [6]

5-41

SENSOR HS
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS) Release the hooks, disconnect the connector [1], then remove the SENSOR HS [2].

[2] [1]

5-42

PCB LED-LAMP FBS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS) Release two hooks [1], then remove the Cover lens [2]. Release two hooks [3], then remove the ASSY case lamp [4]. Remove two screws [5]. Remove one screw [6] and disconnect the connector [7], then remove the PCB LED-LAMP FBS [8]. [5] [8] [3] [5] [6]

[7] [4]

[3] [2] [1]

NOTE
hen you have replaced the lamp to a new one, set the background level. (See page 3-99.) W

5-43

HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE

1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS) Remove two screws [1], then remove the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE [2].

[1] [1] [2]

5-44

MIRROR A/B/C
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Frame scanner FBS. (See FRAME SCANNER FBS) Remove the ASSY case lamp. (See PCB LED-LAMP FBS) Release eight Mirror clamps [1], and remove MIRROR A [2], MIRROR B [3], and MIRROR C [4]. [1] [1]

[2] [1] [1] [1]

[4]

[2]

[1] [1]

[3] [1]

Caution
Handle the mirror gently to avoid from breaking it.

Important
When reassembling Mirror A/B/C, be sure the front side faces inwards and the side with the marking faces outward.

5-45

MOTOR (STEPPING)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove one screw [1]. Disconnect the connector [2]. Remove three screws [3]. Slide the Bracket motor FBS [4], then remove the Belt (timing) [5]. [3] [1] [3] [3]

[2] [5]

[4] 7. Remove the Spring C tension [6] and lift up the Bracket motor FBS [4].

[4]

[6]

5-46

8. Remove two screws [7] and disconnect the connector [8], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [9].

[9]

[8]

[7] [7]

5-47

PCB SCANNER
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove three screws [1], then remove the Plate shield PCB scanner [2]. Disconnect all connectors. Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB SCANNER [4].

[1] [2] [1] [1]

[4]

[3]

5-48

5.2.3 Panel section

PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Disconnect three connectors [1]. Pull out the harness [2]. [1] [2]

8. Remove the Cover stay panel [3]. 9. Remove four screws [4]. 10. Open the Cover front [5], and pull the PANEL [6] forward to remove it. [4] [3] [6] [4]

[5]

5-49

DISPLAY (LCD)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover platen.(See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top.(See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Panel.(See PANEL) Remove four screws [1]. Disconnect the connector [2] from the Speaker and remove the Cover panel lower [3]. * If the connector is not disconnected, the Speaker harness may break. Be sure to disconnect the connector. [1] [3] [1] [1]

[1]

[2]

6. Remove four screws [4], then remove the Cover PCB panel [5]. 7. Disconnect six connectors [6]. 8. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Frame panel [8]. [4] [5] [4]

[4]

[4] [7] [6]

[6] [7]

[8] [6] [7] [6]

5-50

9. Remove four screws [9], then remove the DISPLAY (LCD) [10]. 10. Remove the film harness [11].

[9] [10] [9] [9] [9] [11]

Caution
Handle the LCD gently to avoid from breaking it. If the LCD breaks and the liquid comes into contact with your hands, rinse with water. If the liquid enters your eyes or mouth, rinse with water and consult a physician.

5-51

SPEAKER
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Panel. (See PANEL) Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove two screws [1], then remove the SPEAKER [2]. [1] [2] [1]

5-52

PCB PANEL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Panel. (See PANEL) Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Disconnect six connectors [1]. Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB PANEL [3]. [2] [2] [1] [1] [2] [1] [1] [2] [3]

5-53

PCB PANEL KEY1/KEY2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Panel. (See PANEL) Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove the Cover PCB panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove the Frame panel. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove three screws [1], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY1 [2]. Remove one screw [3], then remove the PCB PANEL KEY2 [4]. [3] [1] [1] [2] [1] [4]

INVERTER
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover platen. (See COVER PLATEN) Remove the ASSY cover top. (See ASSY COVER TOP) Remove the Panel. (See PANEL) Remove the Cover panel lower. (See DISPLAY (LCD)) Remove the two screws [1] and then remove the INVERTER [2]. Disconnect the two connectors [3]. [1] [2] [1] [3]

[3]

5-54

5.2.4 PCB section

PCB PDL
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove one screw [1]. Remove two PCB-PS [2]. Disconnect the connector [3] and remove the PCB ASSY PDL [4].

[3]

[2]

[1] [2]

[4] 7. Remove four screws [5] and remove the PCB PDL [6].

[5] [5]

[5]

[6] [5]

5-55

POWER-SUPPLY
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Disconnect all Power-supply [1] connectors. Remove three screws [2]. Remove the POWER-SUPPLY [1].

[2]

[2] [1]

[2]

5-56

PCB IS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover connect.(See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option.(See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield.(See COVER SHIELD) Remove five screws [1]. Remove one PCB-P [2] from the PCB IS, then remove the PCB IS [3].

[2] [3] [1] [1]

[1]

[1]

[1] 6. Remove the CF card [4].

[4]

5-57

PCB LPH
1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) 2. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) 3. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) 4. Remove the PCB IS. (See PCB IS) 5. Remove the PCB Main. (See PCB MAIN) 6. Disconnect all PCB LPH [1] connectors. 7y. Remove four screws [2], then remove the PCB LPH [1].

[2] [2] [1]

[2] [2]

5-58

PCB MAIN
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the PCB IS. (See PCB IS) Remove two screws [1], then remove the Plate main B [2]. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Bracket lime [4]. Disconnect all PCB Main [5] connectors. Remove nine screws [6], then remove the PCB MAIN [5].

[1] [6]

[6] [6] [6] [6] [6] [4] [6]

[5]

[1] [2]

[3] [6] [6]

5-59

PCB NCU
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove two screws, then remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Open the Cover front [1]. Remove one screw [2]. Remove the Cover left [3] while pressing down on the two hooks.

[2]

[3]

[1]

5. Remove one screw [4] and release the Cable-clamp [5] on the harness. Then pull out the Plate NCU1 [6]. 6. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the PCB NCU [8]. [6] [8] [7]

[4]

[5]

5-60

PCB PSU
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Open the Cover front. (See PCB NCU) Remove one screw. (See PCB NCU) Release two hooks and remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) Disconnect the connector and remove the PCB NCU. (See PCB NCU) Remove two screws [1], then pull the PCB PSU [2] out slightly and disconnect three connectors. Remove the PCB PSU [2].

[1]

[2] [1]

Important
The far end of the PCB PSU is engaged with the hook. When assembling, make sure to engage it with the hook.

5-61

PCB CONNECT LPH

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Disconnect all connectors between the Chassis FBS and PCB main. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Open the Cover jam access [1]. Remove seven screws [2]. * Note the markings on the Chassis FBS to locate the proper screws. 8. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Chassis FBS [4]. [4]

[2]

[2] [2] [2]

[2]

[3]

[1]

9. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Cover left [6]. (See PCB NCU) 10. Remove three screws [7], then remove the Tray paper exit [8]. [7] [8]

[7] [5]

[7]

[6]

5-62

11. Disconnect two connectors [9]. 12. Remove two screws [10], then remove the PCB CONNECT LPH [11].

[10] [11]

[9]

[9]

[10]

5-63

5.2.5 Printer section

TRAY A MP/MP FLAPPER PAD
1. Open the Tray A MP [1]. 2. Release two hooks [2], then remove the TRAY A MP [1].

[2]

[1] [2] 3. Peel off the MP FLAPPER PAD [3].

[3]

5-64

COVER FRONT
1. Pull out the ASSY cassette [1]. 2. Open the COVER FRONT [2] and remove it by releasing two hooks.

[1] [2]

5-65

COVER OPTION/COVER SHIELD

1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) 2. Remove two screws [1], then remove the COVER OPTION [2]. 3. Remove nine screws [3], then remove the COVER SHIELD [4].

[3] [3] [4] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [1] [3] [2] [3] [1]

5-66

COVER BACK
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove two screws [1], then remove the Cover back [2].

[1]

[1]

[2]

5-67

COVER JAM ACCESS

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Cover jam access [1]. Remove the Stopper JAC [2]. Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [3]. Remove the Stopper sensor [4]. Remove one screw [5], then remove the Sheet blind [6] and remove the harness from its path. Remove the COVER JAM ACCESS [1]. [5]

[6] [3]

[2] [4]

[1]

5-68

SOLENOID
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove one screw [1], then remove the Bracket SLND [2]. Disconnect the connector [3] and cut the Cable tie [4]. Remove one screw [5], then remove the SOLENOID [6].

[6] [5] [2]

[1]

[4]

[3]

5-69

CLUTCH
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove two Stopper rings [1]. Disconnect two connectors [2]. Remove two CLUTCHes [3].

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[2] [3]

5-70

RX MOTOR
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove four screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2], then remove the RX MOTOR [3].

[2] [1]

[3]

[1]

5-71

MOTOR (STEPPING)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) Remove two screws [1], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [2]. [2] [1]

[1]

5-72

FRAME DRIVE/GEARS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove three screws [1], then remove the Ground wire [2]. Remove five screws [3], then remove the FRAME DRIVE [4].

[3]

[4] [3] [1] [2] [3] [2] [3] [1]

7. Remove the GEAR 54/28H [5]. 8. Remove the GEAR 73H/23H [6]. 9. Remove the GEAR 61H 0.6 [7].

[4]

[6]

[7]

[5]

5-73

10. Remove the Clutch. (See CLUTCH) 11. Remove the GEAR 59H/19 [8]. 12. Remove the GEAR 35/19 [9]. 13. Remove the GEAR 20 1.0A [10]. 14. Remove the GEAR 21 1.0A [11]. 15. Remove two screws [12], then disconnect the Ground wires [13]. 16. Remove three screws [14], then remove the Stay pickup [15]. 17. Remove the Spring clutch [16]. 18. Remove the GEAR 34 0.8 [17]. 19. Remove the GEAR 34 [18]. 20. Remove the GEAR 41/21 [19]. 21. Remove the GEAR 33H/37 [20]. 22. Remove the GEAR 22 [21]. 23. Remove the GEAR 57H/27H [22].

[10] [11] [9] [8]

[22] [20] [21] [18] [17] [19] [15] [16]

[13]

[14] [12]

[12]

[13]

5-74

ROLLER TRANSFER
1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Cover jam access [1]. Remove the Stopper JAC [2]. Remove four screws [3]. Disconnect the PCB ERS lamp connector [4], and remove the Guide inner [5].

[3] [4] [2]

[3]

5. Remove two screws [6], then remove the Cover bracket transfer [7] and Guide paper transfer A [8]. [6] [7] [1] [5] [8] [6]

5-75

6. Remove two screws [9], then remove the Bracket PCB LED [10]. [9]

[9] [10]

7. Remove two screws [11], then remove the Guide paper transfer B [12] and the Plate discharge [13].

[13]

[11]

[11]

[12]

5-76

8. Remove one E-ring [14], then remove the Bracket transfer B [15] and the Bracket transfer F [16] from the rear side of the Guide inner [5]. 9. Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER [17].

[15]

[17]

[14]

[16]

[5]

5-77

ROLLER REGISTER
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the Cover jam access. (See ROLLER TRANSFER) Remove the Stopper JAC. ( See ROLLER TRANSFER) Remove the Guide inner. (See ROLLER TRANSFER) Remove the E-ring 4 (DR4) [1] and the E-ring 5 (DR5) [2]. Remove the Gear 16H 0.8 [3], then remove two Bearing presses [4] and Spring C presses [5]. Remove the ROLLER REGISTER [6] by sliding it.

[5]

[2]

[4]

[1] [6] [4] [3] [5] [4] [3]

[5]

5-78

SENSOR TRAYS
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS) Remove the Sensor stopper [1] from the bottom of the body. Lift up the Feeler MP [2]. Release the hook from the bottom of the body and remove the SENSOR TRAYS [3]. [3]

[1]

[2]

5-79

SENSOR JAMC1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Open the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS) Remove the Sensor stopper [1]. Release the hooks and remove the SENSOR JAMC1 [2].

[2]

[1]

5-80

SENSOR PSS
1. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS) 2. Remove one screw [1], then remove the Guide press B [3] while lifting the Feeler PSS [2]. 3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PSS [4].

[2] [2] [4] [1] [3]

5-81

ROLLER PICKUP MP/PAD PRESSURE MP

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the Clutch [1]. (See CLUTCH) Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS) Remove two E-rings [2]. Lift up the Guide paper MPDUP [3] and push down the MP pressure [4]. Remove the ROLLER PICKUP MP [5] by sliding it to the left.

[3]

[1] [4] [2] [2] [5] 10. Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP [6].

[6]

Important
When attaching the Pad pressure MP, align it with the notch in the main unit.

5-82

PRINTER FUSER
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove five screws [1]. 3. Disconnect two connectors [2] and remove the PRINTER FUSER [3]. [2] [2]

[1] [1] [1] [3] [1]

[1]

Caution
Before removing the Printer fuser, make sure the power cord is unplugged. Failure to do so may result in electrical shock. Make sure the Printer fuser become cool before removing it. The Roller heat is extremely HOT immediately after operation and may cause burns. Do not touch the thermostat or thermal fuse while performing this procedure.

5-83

THERMISTOR
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove the Printer fuser. (See PRINTER FUSER) 3. Remove one screw [1], then remove the THERMISTOR [2].

[2] [1]

Caution
Be careful not to bend the Thermistor. Pay attention to the orientation of the Thermistor when mounting it. The smooth side should face the Roller heat. [Correct] [Fault]

5-84

SCRAPER
1. Open the Cover jam access. 2. Remove the Printer fuser. (See PRINTER FUSER) 3. Remove three Stopper Scrapers [1] and remove three SCRAPERs [2].
[2]

[1]

ROLLER PRESS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the Cover jam access. Remove the Printer fuser. (See PRINTER FUSER) Remove seven screws [1], then remove the Frame inner [2]. Remove the Guide enter [4] from the Frame outer [3]. Pull up the Knob B [5] and Knob F [6] and remove the ROLLER PRESS [7]. [1] [1] [1]

[5]

[2]

[7]

[6] [4] [3]

5-85

ASSY INTERLOCK
1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) 2. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) 3. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) 4. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) 5. Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) 6. Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) 7. Remove the Tray paper exit. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) 8. Open the Cover jam access [1]. 9. Remove one screw [2], then remove the Plate upper FG [3]. 10. Remove five screws [4], then remove the Plate FG exit [5] and the Frame upper [6]. 11. Disconnect the connector [7] and remove the ASSY INTERLOCK [8].

[4]

[4] [6]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[4] [7] [5] [4] [8] [1]

5-86

SENSOR PDS/DPS/SHIFT
1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) 2. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) 3. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) 4. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) 5. Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) 6. Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) 7. Remove the Frame upper. (See ASSY INTERLOCK) 8. Remove the Roller exit. (See SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT) 9. Remove the two screws [1], then remove the Guide fuser [2]. 10. Remove the connector of Sensor PDS [3]/DPS [4], and remove the harness from its path. 11. Release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSOR PDS [3]/DPS [4]. 12. Disconnect the connectors, release the hooks from the reverse side and remove the SENSOR SHIFT [5]. [1]

[2] [1]

[3]

[4] [5]

5-87

SHAFT ROLLER PRESS/ROLLER EXIT

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) Remove the Frame upper. (See ASSY INTERLOCK) Remove the two screws [1], and then remove the Guide shift unit [2], Supported gear [3], Gear 20 [4], parallel pin [5], and two Bearings D6 9 [6]. 9. Remove the Rack shift unit [7], Shaft roller press [8], and Roller exit [9] all together. 10. Remove the SHAFT ROLLER PRESS [8] from the Rack shift unit [7]. * hen doing so, be careful because the plate spring [10] and the coil spring [11] will come off at the W same time. 11. Remove one E-ring [12], then remove the ROLLER EXIT [9]. [1] [12] [7] [2]

[9]

[8] [6] [5] [4] [1]

[3]

[10] [11]

5-88

ROLLER FEED DUPLEX

1. Remove the Cover jam access. (See COVER JAM ACCESS) 2. Remove the Guide inner. (See ROLLER TRANSFER) 3. Remove two screws [1], then remove the Guide upper JAC [2]. [1] [1]

[2]

4. 5. 6. 7.

Remove four E-rings [3], then remove two Flange pulleys [4]. Remove the Belt (timing) [5] from the Gear 20/25P [6]. Remove two Gears 20/25P [6]. Remove four Bearings D6 8 [7]. [6] [5] [3] [4] [4] [7] [3]

[6] [7]

[3]

[7]

5-89

8. Remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX [8]. [8]

5-90

TONER SENSOR (PCB TOS)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) Remove the Cover front. (See COVER FRONT) Lower the Knob pressure [1] to the left.

[1]

8. Open the Cover jam access [2]. 9. Release two hooks [3], and remove the Bracket toner sensor B [4].

[2]

[4] [3]

[3]

5-91

10. Remove one screw [5], then remove the PCB TOS [6].

[5]

[6]

11. Release two hooks [7], then remove the Bracket toner sensor [8].

[8]

[7]

[7]

12. Remove one screw [9], then remove the PCB TOS [10].

[9] [10]

5-92

SENSOR PES1
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st. 2. Remove one screw [1] using a short screwdriver, then remove the Bracket sensor [2].

[2] [1]

3. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES1 [3].

[3] [2]

5-93

SENSOR OPEN1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN1 [1].

[1]

5-94

PRINTER HEAD
1. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) 2. Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) 3. Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) 4. Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) 5. Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) 6. Open the Cover jam access. (See ASSY INTERLOCK) 7. Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) 8. Remove the Tray paper exit. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) 9. Open the Cover front, then remove the developer and the drum. (See COVER FRONT) 10. Pull out the Film harness [1]. 11. Remove two screws [2], then disconnect the Ground wires [3]. 12. Remove two screws [4], then remove the Stay LED [5] and the Bracket LED [6].

[2] [3]

[4] [5] [2] [3]

[4]

[1]

[6]

5-95

11. Push down the hooks [7] and remove the PRINTER HEAD[8]. [7] [8]

[7]

Important
When inserting the harness, make sure it goes all the way in.

5-96

MOTOR (STEPPING)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover shield. (See COVER SHIELD) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the Chassis FBS. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) Remove the Cover left. (See PCB NCU) Remove the Tray paper exit. (See PCB CONNECT LPH) Disconnect the connector [2] from the PCB LPH [1]. [1]

[2]

9. Remove the two screws [3], then remove the MOTOR (STEPPING) [4].

[4] [3] [3]

5-97

WEIGHT PAPER A/B

1. Remove both sets of two shafts [1], and remove the WEIGHT PAPER A [2] and WEIGHT PAPER B [3]. [1] [1]

[3]

[2]

5-98

FILTER VOC
1. 2. 4. 5. Remove the Cover connect. (See COVER CONNECT) Remove the Cover option. (See COVER OPTION) Remove the Cover back. (See COVER BACK) Remove the FILTER VOC [1].

[1]

5-99

5.2.6 Paper feeding section

ROLLER PICKUP (1st CST)/(2nd CST)
1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1]. 2. Remove one Stopper ring [2] and Bearing [3]. 3. Remove the ROLLER PICKUP CST [4].

[4] [3]

[2]

[1]

5-100

ASSY PIECE PRESSURE (1st CST)/(2nd CST)

1. Remove the Roller pickup. (See ROLLER PICKUP) 2. Remove the ASSY PIECE PRESSURE [1].

[1]

5-101

PIECE COVER CST (1st CST paper dust)

1. Pull out the Cassette 1st [1]. 2. Remove two screws [2], then remove the PIECE COVER CST [3].

[1] [3]

[2]

[2]

Important
Paper dust will collect in the Piece cover CST. Empty it when it becomes full.

5-102

SENSOR JAMC2
1. 2. 3. 4. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. Open the Cover jam access 2nd [2]. Remove the Sensor stopper [3]. Release the hook on the inside and remove the SENSOR JAMC2 [4].

[3] [1] [4]

[2]

5-103

SENSOR PES2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. Pull out the Cassette 2nd [2]. Turn the Printer cassette 2nd [3] over. Remove one screw [4], then remove the Bracket sensor [5]. Release the hook and remove the SENSOR PES2 [6]. [1] [3]

[6] [4] [5]

[2]

5-104

ROLLER FEED 2ND (2nd CST)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. Remove two screws [2], then remove the Guide paper [3]. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the Bearing D6 [5]. Remove one screw [6], then remove the Plate frame F [7]. Remove the ROLLER FEED 2ND [8]. [2] [3]

[8] [1] [4] [5]

[2]

[6] [7]

5-105

PLATE FRAME B
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd [1] from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2) Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND) Disconnect the connector [2]. Remove two screws [3], then remove the PLATE FRAME B [4]. [3]

[3] [2] [4]

[1]

5-106

ASSY SHAFT JOINT (2nd CST)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2) Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND) Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B) Remove three screws [2], then remove the Holder gear 2nd [3]. Remove one E-ring [4], then remove the ASSY SHAFT JOINT [5].

[1]

[5] [3]

[4] [2] [2] [2]

5-107

SOLENOID (2nd CST)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2) Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND) Remove the Plate frame B [1]. (See PLATE FRAME B) Remove one screw [2], then remove the SOLENOID (2nd CST) [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

5-108

SENSOR OPEN2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Remove the Printer cassette 2nd from the main unit. (See SENSOR PES2) Pull out the Cassette 2nd. (See SENSOR PES2) Remove the Roller feed 2nd. (See ROLLER FEED 2ND) Remove the Plate frame B. (See PLATE FRAME B) Release the hook and remove the SENSOR OPEN2 [1].

[1]

5-109

5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette. 2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS. 3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.

5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.

1. Press <Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3>. 2. Select the paper source you want to adjust.

3. Select either Upper, Lower, Left or Right.

6. Adjust the printer registration:

For example: When you set +12.3 in upper direction, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set +12.3 in lower direction, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward. When you set +12.3 in left direction, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you set +12.3 in right direction, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between 12.7 mm and +12.7 mm. Always enter the direction for the positive value: When you want enter -0.5 to upper (left) direction, enter +0.5 to lower (right) direction.

7. Press [Enter].

NOTE
However you select cassette 1, 2, Bypass tray, or Duplex Unit in step 2, the adjustment in vertical directions are copied to all other paper sources.

5-110

Printer registration (top)

Test pattern H

Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.

Standard 10 1.5 (mm)

Setting Range -12.8 to 12.7 (mm) (0.1 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0) 3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (See 3.12.2 Printer Test.) 4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.

5. To use the Printer registration mode, press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin. 6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you changed in step 2.

5-111

Printer registration (side)

Test pattern H

Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.

Standard 10 1.8 (mm)

Setting Range 12.8 to 12.7 (mm) (0.6773 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the cassette or tray you want to adjust. 2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0) 3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (See 3.12.2 Printer Test.) 4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.

5. To use the Printer registration mode, press Setting>, <*>, <4>, <3> the margin. 6. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you changed in step 2.

5-112

5.3.3 Zoom adjustment

FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)

0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

0.55

0.35

0.40

0.40

0.35

2003-01
0.30

NO.20031021

0.55 0.75

0.25

1.00

0.20

1.25

0.15

1.40

0.10

Zoom ratio 100 %

Standard 1.0 %

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:017

Setting Range 1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 017 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

5-113

FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)

0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

0.55

0.35

0.40

0.40

0.35

2003-01
0.30

NO.20031021

0.55 0.75

0.25

1.00

0.20

1.25

0.15

1.40

0.10

Zoom ratio 100 %

Standard 1.0 %

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:016

Setting Range 1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 016 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

5-114

ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)

0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

0.55

0.35

0.40

0.40

0.35

2003-01
0.30

NO.20031021

0.55 0.75

0.25

1.00

0.20

1.25

0.15

1.40

0.10

Zoom ratio 100 %

Standard 1.0 %

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:037

Setting Range 1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF. 3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 012 meets the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

5-115

ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)

0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

0.55

0.35

0.40

0.40

0.35

2003-01
0.30

NO.20031021

0.55 0.75

0.25

1.00

0.20

1.25

0.15

1.40

0.10

Zoom ratio 100 %

Standard 1.0 %

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:036

Setting Range 1.5 to 1.5 % (0.1 % step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter size paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart in the ADF. 3. Make two copies on paper in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 011 to meet the specification.
If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

5-116

5.3.4 Registration adjustment

FBS registration (top)

Edge of the paper

A
Test Chart
0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

Standard 0 2.2 (mm)

0.55

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:018

Setting Range 2.70 ~ 2.70 (mm) (0.0212 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the first cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value. If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.

5-117

FBS registration (side)

A
Test Chart

0.10

Edge of the paper

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

Standard 0 2.6 (mm)

0.55

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:015

Setting Range

10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm)

(0.0847 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the document glass. 3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value. If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.

5-118

ADF registration (top)

Edge of the paper

A
Test Chart
0.10

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

Standard 0 2.2 (mm)

0.55

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:038

Setting Range 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm) (0.0847 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF. 3. Make a copy of it in the first cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 013 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value. If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.

5-119

ADF registration (side)

A
Test Chart

0.10

Edge of the paper

1.40

0.15

1.25

0.20

1.00

0.25

0.75

0.30

Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the first cassette and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.

Standard 0 2.9 (mm)

0.55

Adjustment Tool Machine parameter:035

Setting Range 10.76 ~ 10.76 (mm) (0.0847 mm step)

Adjustment procedure
1. Load letter paper to the 1st cassette. 2. Place a Test Chart on the ADF. 3. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification. 4. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications. If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment. 5. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (See 3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters.) 6. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 010 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value. If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.

5-120

5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment

1. Open the Guide outer. 2. Remove the Assy pad separator. (See page 5-21.) 3. Adjust the separation pressure.
Rotate direction Clockwise Counterclockwise Separation pressure Down Up

5-121

5.3.6 FBS skew adjustment

When the image scanned with the document glass is skewed, you can adjust it by shifting a part.

1. Open the platen cover, and remove Assy Cover Contact. (see page 5-38) 2. Loosen two screws securing the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE. 3. Slide the HOLDER SHAFT GUIDE to the right (the direction indicated with arrow) to adjust its position.

4. When the adjustment is over, tighten the screws and reattach the Assy Cover Contact.

5-122

5.3.7 DADF skew adjustment

1. Remove the five screws [1], then remove the Guide outer A [2]. 2. Remove one screw [3], then remove the Holder register [4].

[2]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[1] [1] 3. Invert the Holder register [4] and reinstall it. [1] [1]

[4]

Direction A Reference position Position of Position of Direction B screw when screw when adjusting mounting

5-123

4. If the adjustment is made in direction A: the copied image will be rotated clockwise in relation to the recording paper.

5. If the adjustment is made in direction B: the copied image will be rotated counterclockwise in relation to the recording paper.

5-124

Muratec America, Inc. 3301 E. Plano Parkway, Ste. 100 Plano, Texas 75074 (469) 429-3300 (Tel) (469) 429-3465 (Fax) www.muratec.com